PLC Soft Master ML200

Honeywell Process Solutions
SoftMaster
User's Guide
ML200-SoftMaster
R200
January 2011
Release 200
Honeywell
Notices and Trademarks

Copyright 2011 by Honeywell International Srl.
Release 200 January 2011
While this information is current in good faith and believed to be accurate, Honeywell disclaims the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and makes no express
warranties except as may be stated in its written agreement with and for its customers.
In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect, special or consequential damages. The
information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice.
Honeywell, PlantScape, Experion PKS, and TotalPlant are registered trademarks of Honeywell
International Inc.
Other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

1860 W. Rose Garden Lane
Phoenix, AZ 85027 USA
1-800 822-7673
ii
SoftMaster User's Guide

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
About This Document

This document describes the operations involved in using SoftMaster to program and
debug the MasterLogic 200 PLC series.
Release Information
Document Name
Document
ID
Release
Number
Publication
Date
SoftMaster User's Guide - ML200
ML200SoftMaster
200
January
2011
References
The following list identifies all documents that may be source of reference for material discussed
in this publication.
Document Title
2MLI CPUU Users Guide
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
iii
Support and Other Contacts

United States and Canada
Contact:
Phone:
Fascimile:
Mail:
Honeywell Solution Support Center

1-800-822-7673
Calls are answered by dispatcher between 6:00 am and 4:00 pm
Mountain Standard Time. Emergency calls outside normal working hours
are received by an answering service and returned within one hour.
1-973-455-5000
Honeywell TAC, MS L17
1860 W. Garden Lane
Phoenix, AZ, 85027 USA
Europe, Middle East, and Africa (EMEA)

Contact:
Phone:
Fascimile:
Mail:
Honeywell TAC-EMEA
+32-2-728-2345
+32-2-728-2696
TAC-BE02
Hermes Plaza
Hermeslaan, 1H
B-1831 Diegem, Belgium
Contact:
Phone:
Honeywell Global TAC Pacific

1300-364-822 (toll free within Australia)
+61-8-9362-9559 (outside Australia)
+61-8-9362-9564
Honeywell Limited Australia
5 Kitchener Way
Burswood 6100, Western Australia
GTAC@honeywell.com
Pacific
Fascimile:
Mail:
Email:
India
Contact:
Phone:
Fascimile:
Mail:
Email:
iv
Honeywell Global TAC India

+91-20- 6603-9400
+91-20- 6603-9800
Honeywell Automation India Ltd
56 and 57, Hadapsar Industrial Estate
Hadapsar, Pune 411 013, India
Global-TAC-India@honeywell.com
Honeywell
R200
January 2011
Korea
Contact:
Phone:
Fascimile:
Mail:
Email:
Honeywell Global TAC Korea

+82-2-799-6317
+82-2-792-9015
Honeywell Co., Ltd
4F, Sangam IT Tower
1590, DMC Sangam-dong, Mapo-gu
Seoul, 121-836, Korea
Global-TAC-Korea@honeywell.com
Peoples Republic of China

Contact:
Phone:
Mail:
Email:
Honeywell Global TAC China

+86- 21-2219-6888
800-820-0237
400-820-0386
Honeywell (China) Co., Ltd
33/F, Tower A, City Center, 100 Zunyi Rd.
Shanghai 200051, Peoples Republic of China
Global-TAC-China@honeywell.com
Singapore
Contact:
Phone:
Fascimile:
Mail:
Email:
Honeywell Global TAC South East Asia

+65-6580-3500
+65-6580-3501
+65-6445-3033
Honeywell Private Limited
Honeywell Building
17, Changi Business Park Central 1
Singapore 486073
GTAC-SEA@honeywell.com
Taiwan
Contact:
Phone:
Fascimile:
Mail:
Email:
R200
January 2011
Honeywell Global TAC Taiwan

+886-7-536-2567
+886-7-536-2039
Honeywell Taiwan Ltd.
17F-1, No. 260, Jhongshan 2nd Road.
Cianjhen District
Kaohsiung, Taiwan, ROC
Global-TAC-Taiwan@honeywell.com

Honeywell
Japan
Contact:
Phone:
Fascimile:
Mail:
Email:
Honeywell Global TAC Japan

+81-3-6730-7160
+81-3-6730-7228
Honeywell Japan Inc.
New Pier Takeshiba, South Tower Building,
20th Floor, 1-16-1 Kaigan, Minato-ku,
Tokyo 105-0022, Japan
Global-TAC-JapanJA25@honeywell.com
Elsewhere
Call your nearest Honeywell office.
World Wide Web

Honeywell Solution Support Online:
http://www.honeywell.com/ps
Training Classes
Honeywell Automation College:
http://www.automationcollege.com
vi

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
Acronyms and Definitions

Acronym/Term
Definition
A/D
Analog to Digital Conversion
Base
Base is the back plane of the PLC on which the power

supply, communication and other modules gets installed
For example: main base, expansion base.
BCD
Binary coded decimal
Cold restart
This is one of the CPU restart modes which affects the

variable parameters of the I/O image area when the CPU
is restarted. With the CPU restart mode set to cold restart,
all the parameters (like the internal register, timer, and
counter) initialize to zero.
CPU
Central processing unit
D/A
Digital to analog conversion
Direct variable
Memory area which can be directly accessed with IEC

standard addressing notations with or without any variable
name. They are %I (input), %Q (output), and %M (internal
flags and registers) variables.
Address Examples: %IX0.0.2, %QW1.2.1, and %MD1234
Dnet
DeviceNet Network.
FEnet
Fast Ethernet Network.
FO
Fiber Optic
Function
Is an operation unit that immediately outputs the operation

results for an input such as four arithmetical operations
and comparative operations.
Function block
Is an operation unit that memorizes the operation results

within the commands such as timer and counter or results
derived from several scans. Function blocks are the
fundamental element for logic programs. Function blocks
like timer and counter have input and output connections
to indicate the flow.
HSL
R200
January 2011
High-Speed Link Service in MasterLogic-200

communication modules.
Honeywell
vii
Acronym/Term
Definition
I/O
Input/Output
I/O image area
Internal memory area of CPU module installed to maintain

I/O states.
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
Interrupt task
Interrupt driven task programs executed on meeting a

given condition, in addition, to regular scan programs. It
consists of two types:
Timer interrupt task
Internal flag interrupt task
KB
Kilo bytes
KStep
Kilo steps
LSB
Least significant bit
MB
Mega bytes
ML-200
MasterLogic-200
Module
A standard component with a specific function to configure

a system, such as the I/O board assembled to be inserted
into the base motherboard.
For example: CPU module, power module, and I/O
module.
viii
MSB
Most significant bit
O/S
Operating system
P2P
Point to point service in MasterLogic-200 communication

modules
PAC
Process automation controller
PLC
Programmable logic controller
PLC system
A system consisting of a PLC, CPU, modules, and

peripherals, configured to be controlled by a user
program.
Pnet
Profibus-DP network.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
Acronym/Term
Definition
RAM
Random access memory
RTC
As an abbreviation of real time clock, it is collectively

referred as a universal IC, with the function of a clock.
RTC
Real time clock
Snet
Serial link network.
SoftMaster
Programming tool for creating, editing, and debugging a

program.
STP
Shielded twisted pair
Symbolic variable
Named variables which are declared with a name, type,

but address is automatically allocated in symbolic memory
area (%A) by the CPU. For instance, named variables
declared as Valve1, Pump2 or Speed3 with any IEC
standard data type.
TP
Twisted pair cables (typically CAT5 cables with RJ45

connectors for Ethernet communication)
UTP
Unshield twisted pair
Warm restart
This is one of the CPU restart modes which affects the

variable parameters of the I/O image area when the CPU
is restarted. When the CPU restart mode is set to warm
restart, all the parameters (like the internal register, timer
and counter) retain the previous values.
Watchdog timer
A timer to monitor pre-determined execution time of a

program and to generate a warning, when it is not
complete within the time.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
ix
Symbol Definitions
Symbol Definitions
The following table lists the symbols used in this document to denote certain conditions.
Symbol
Definition
ATTENTION: Identifies information that requires special
consideration.
TIP: Identifies advice or hints for the user, often in terms of
performing a task.
REFERENCE -EXTERNAL: Identifies an additional source of
information outside of the bookset.
REFERENCE - INTERNAL: Identifies an additional source of
information within the bookset.
CAUTION
Indicates a situation which, if not avoided, may result in equipment

or work (data) on the system being damaged or lost, or may result in
the inability to properly operate the process.
CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used
to alert against unsafe practices.
CAUTION symbol on the equipment refers the user to the product
manual for additional information. The symbol appears next to
required information in the manual.
WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not
avoided, could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING symbol on the equipment refers the user to the product
manual for additional information. The symbol appears next to
required information in the manual.
WARNING, Risk of electrical shock: Potential shock hazard where
HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms, 42.4 Vpeak, or
60 VDC may be accessible.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
Symbol Definitions
Symbol
Definition
ESD HAZARD: Danger of an electro-static discharge to which
equipment may be sensitive. Observe precautions for handling
electrostatically sensitive devices.
Protective Earth (PE) terminal: Provided for connection of the
protective earth (green or green/yellow) supply system conductor.
Functional earth terminal: Used for non-safety purposes such as

noise immunity improvement.
NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to Protective Earth at the
source of supply in accordance with national local electrical code
requirements.
Earth Ground: Functional earth connection.
NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to Protective Earth at the
source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical
code requirements.
Chassis Ground: Identifies a connection to the chassis or frame of
the equipment shall be bonded to Protective Earth at the source of
supply in accordance with national and local electrical code
requirements.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
xi
Symbol Definitions
xii

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
Contents
1.
INTRODUCTION ..........................................................................25
1.1
Features of SoftMaster ................................................................................. 25
1.2
System requirements .................................................................................... 27
2.
INSTALLATION ...........................................................................29
2.1
Installing SoftMaster ..................................................................................... 29
2.2
Installing the USB device driver .................................................................. 31
Verifying the USB device driver installation ..........................................................................32
3.
BASIC APPLICATION .................................................................35

3.1
SoftMaster user interface ............................................................................. 35
3.2
Edit functions ................................................................................................ 47
3.3
Shortcut keys................................................................................................. 49
3.4
Customizing SoftMaster ............................................................................... 51
Menu bar ..............................................................................................................................36

Tool bar ................................................................................................................................45
Status display line ................................................................................................................46
Change view window ...........................................................................................................47
Cutpaste .............................................................................................................................47
Copypaste ..........................................................................................................................47
Drag and drop ......................................................................................................................47
Zooming in/zooming out .......................................................................................................48
Configuring shortcut keys .....................................................................................................49
Shortcut keys .......................................................................................................................49
Configuring SoftMaster options ............................................................................................52

Configuring LD option ..........................................................................................................57
Configuring SFC option ........................................................................................................58
Configuring ST option ..........................................................................................................60
4.
PROJECT CONFIGURATION ......................................................63

4.1
Overview of project configuration ............................................................... 63
Project configuration window................................................................................................63
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
xiii
Contents
Symbol Definitions
4.2
Project management .....................................................................................65
4.3
Project item ....................................................................................................68
4.4
Project password ...........................................................................................81
Creating a new project ........................................................................................................ 65

Opening the project ............................................................................................................. 66
Opening a project from PLC ................................................................................................ 66
Saving a project................................................................................................................... 66
Saving project as ................................................................................................................. 67
Add item .............................................................................................................................. 68
Adding a program ................................................................................................................ 72
Exporting to file.................................................................................................................... 72
Importing from file................................................................................................................ 75
Changing program execution sequence .............................................................................. 79
Comparing projects ............................................................................................................. 80
Setting project password ..................................................................................................... 81
Deleting password ............................................................................................................... 82
5.
VARIABLES ................................................................................ 83
5.1
Overview of variables ....................................................................................83
5.2
Global/direct variable ....................................................................................83
5.3
Global/direct variable edit .............................................................................86
5.4
Local variable .................................................................................................97
5.5
Function block variable...............................................................................100
Global variable .................................................................................................................... 83

Direct variable comments .................................................................................................... 84
Flag ..................................................................................................................................... 84
Global/direct variable registration ........................................................................................ 86
Copy, cut, delete, and paste ................................................................................................ 88
Changing variable name ..................................................................................................... 93
Insert line ............................................................................................................................. 93
Delete line ........................................................................................................................... 94
Drag and drop ..................................................................................................................... 94
Export to file ........................................................................................................................ 95
Preview ............................................................................................................................... 95
Print ..................................................................................................................................... 96
Other functions .................................................................................................................... 96
Local variable registration ................................................................................................... 97
Editing a local variable ........................................................................................................ 97
FB variable ........................................................................................................................ 100
FB variable edit ................................................................................................................. 100
FB variable registration ..................................................................................................... 100
xiv

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
Contents
Symbol Definitions
5.6
FUNCTION variable ..................................................................................... 103
5.7
Editing variables.......................................................................................... 105
5.8
User-defined function/function block ....................................................... 107
FUN variable ......................................................................................................................103

FUN variable edit ...............................................................................................................103
FUN variable registration....................................................................................................103
Variable registration ...........................................................................................................105
Creating user-defined function/function block program ......................................................108
Creating user-defined function/function block I/O variable .................................................109
User-defined function/function block programming ............................................................110
Using user-defined function/function blocks .......................................................................111
6.
LD EDIT ......................................................................................113
6.1
Overview ...................................................................................................... 113
6.2
Limits ............................................................................................................ 113
6.3
Program edit ................................................................................................ 114
6.4
Viewing program options ........................................................................... 138
Edit tools ............................................................................................................................114

Input contact point ..............................................................................................................116
Input OR contact point .......................................................................................................117
Entering variable/address...................................................................................................118
Inserting lines .....................................................................................................................121
Inserting coil .......................................................................................................................121
Inserting a function block ...................................................................................................122
Favorite function block .......................................................................................................124
Entering comments ............................................................................................................127
Input label...........................................................................................................................129
Insert extension function ....................................................................................................130
Insert cell ............................................................................................................................131
Insert line............................................................................................................................131
Delete item .........................................................................................................................132
Delete cell ..........................................................................................................................132
Delete line ..........................................................................................................................133
Copy/cut/paste ...................................................................................................................133
Undo and redo ...................................................................................................................134
Program edit mode .............................................................................................................135
View IL program .................................................................................................................138
Program magnification change...........................................................................................138
View address......................................................................................................................139
View variables ....................................................................................................................139
View address/variables ......................................................................................................140
View address/comment ......................................................................................................140
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
xv
Contents
Symbol Definitions
View variables/comments .................................................................................................. 140

Adjust number of contact point .......................................................................................... 141
LD view properties............................................................................................................. 142
6.5
Additional edit function...............................................................................143
Optimize program .............................................................................................................. 143

Block mask instruction ....................................................................................................... 144
Bookmark .......................................................................................................................... 145
Go to ................................................................................................................................. 148
7.
SFC EDIT ................................................................................... 153

7.1
Overview .......................................................................................................153
7.2
SFC program limitations .............................................................................153
7.3
Program edit .................................................................................................154
7.4
View program ...............................................................................................175
Edit tools ........................................................................................................................... 154

Input step/transition ........................................................................................................... 155
Input action ........................................................................................................................ 157
Input block/transition ......................................................................................................... 158
Input label .......................................................................................................................... 158
Input jump ......................................................................................................................... 159
Create left branch .............................................................................................................. 160
Create right branch............................................................................................................ 162
Edit step property .............................................................................................................. 164
Transition property ............................................................................................................ 165
Action property .................................................................................................................. 166
Edit block property............................................................................................................. 168
Edit label property ............................................................................................................. 169
Jump property ................................................................................................................... 169
Set branch priority ............................................................................................................. 170
Erase branch priority ......................................................................................................... 171
Delete item ........................................................................................................................ 171
Copy/cut/paste .................................................................................................................. 172
Cut/paste ........................................................................................................................... 173
Undo and redo................................................................................................................... 173
Program edit mode ............................................................................................................ 175
Program zoom in/out ......................................................................................................... 175
SFC property ..................................................................................................................... 175
View block/action/transition list .......................................................................................... 182
Open action/transition ....................................................................................................... 183
Address/variables .............................................................................................................. 183
Address/comments............................................................................................................ 183
Adjust contact number ....................................................................................................... 184
xvi

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
Contents
Symbol Definitions
7.5
Edit additional function .............................................................................. 185
Bookmark setting ...............................................................................................................185

Go to ..................................................................................................................................185
8.
PROGRAMMING ........................................................................187
8.1
Cross reference ........................................................................................... 187
8.2
Used address ............................................................................................... 191
8.3
Check program ............................................................................................ 193
View all addresses .............................................................................................................187

Data sorting ........................................................................................................................188
Output cross reference instantly.........................................................................................189
Check duplicate coil instantly .............................................................................................190
Viewing used address ........................................................................................................191
View address uses .............................................................................................................192
Check program setting .......................................................................................................193
Check result trace ..............................................................................................................195
Logic error ..........................................................................................................................195
Grammar error ...................................................................................................................200
9.
FIND/REPLACE .........................................................................213
9.1
Find address ................................................................................................ 213
9.2
Find text ....................................................................................................... 216
9.3
Address replacement .................................................................................. 219
9.4
Text replacement ......................................................................................... 223
9.5
Find again .................................................................................................... 225
Find next address ...............................................................................................................214

Find all address ..................................................................................................................215
Finding text.........................................................................................................................216
Find all text .........................................................................................................................218
Replace address ................................................................................................................219
Replace all addresses ........................................................................................................221
Replace text string .............................................................................................................223
Replace all string ................................................................................................................225
10.
PARAMETERS ...........................................................................227
10.1
Basic parameter ....................................................................................... 227
Basic parameter setting .....................................................................................................227
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
xvii
Contents
Symbol Definitions
10.2
I/O parameters ..........................................................................................232
Setting I/O parameters ...................................................................................................... 232

Base module setup............................................................................................................ 234
Module information setting based on slots ........................................................................ 235
I/O parameter edit function ................................................................................................ 235
Detailed module information setting .................................................................................. 237
I/O parameter print function ............................................................................................... 245
11.
ONLINE...................................................................................... 247
11.1
Connection options for the PLC .............................................................247
11.2
Online functions .......................................................................................252
11.3
Module changing wizard .........................................................................275
Local connection setting .................................................................................................... 247

Using the local RS-232C ................................................................................................... 248
Using the local USB .......................................................................................................... 249
Remote 1 connect setting .................................................................................................. 249
Remote 2 connect setting .................................................................................................. 251
Connect ............................................................................................................................. 252
Write .................................................................................................................................. 254
Read .................................................................................................................................. 255
Change mode .................................................................................................................... 255
Compare with PLC ............................................................................................................ 256
Reset PLC ......................................................................................................................... 257
Clearing PLC data ............................................................................................................. 257
PLC information................................................................................................................. 258
Password .......................................................................................................................... 259
PLC history ........................................................................................................................ 262
PLC error/warning ............................................................................................................. 265
Flash memory setting ........................................................................................................ 265
Force I/O setting ................................................................................................................ 266
Force I/O setting ................................................................................................................ 268
Forced I/O cancel .............................................................................................................. 269
Skip I/O setting .................................................................................................................. 270
Fault mask ......................................................................................................................... 273
12.
MONITORING ............................................................................ 279
12.1
Monitoring .................................................................................................279
12.2
LD program monitoring ...........................................................................284
Start/stop monitoring ......................................................................................................... 279

Change current value ........................................................................................................ 279
Pause/restart monitoring ................................................................................................... 281
Pausing conditions ............................................................................................................ 282
xviii

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
Contents
Symbol Definitions
Start/stop monitoring ..........................................................................................................285
12.3
Variable monitoring ................................................................................. 286
12.4
System monitoring .................................................................................. 296
12.5
Address monitoring ................................................................................ 306
Registering variable/comment ............................................................................................287

Register all .........................................................................................................................288
Register by user .................................................................................................................289
Drag and drop register from other windows .......................................................................289
View detailed/briefly ...........................................................................................................291
Monitoring operations .........................................................................................................294
Find ....................................................................................................................................295
Print ....................................................................................................................................295
Alignment ...........................................................................................................................295
Basic application ................................................................................................................296

Connect/disconnect ............................................................................................................298
System synchronization .....................................................................................................298
All I/O modules ON/OFF ....................................................................................................299
Selected I/O modules ON/OFF ..........................................................................................299
Change current value .........................................................................................................300
Information display of power module ..................................................................................300
Information display of CPU module ....................................................................................301
Information display of communication module ...................................................................302
Viewing information of special modules .............................................................................302
Special module monitoring .................................................................................................303
Save ...................................................................................................................................304
Open ..................................................................................................................................304
Navigate base ....................................................................................................................305
Print preview ......................................................................................................................305
Basic application ................................................................................................................306
Address areas ....................................................................................................................307
Data format and display items ............................................................................................307
Edit data .............................................................................................................................308
Save address .....................................................................................................................309
Open address.....................................................................................................................309
Data value setting ..............................................................................................................310
Clear data...........................................................................................................................311
Write to PLC .......................................................................................................................311
Read from PLC ..................................................................................................................312
Write selected area on PLC ...............................................................................................313
Change current value .........................................................................................................314
PLC type settings ...............................................................................................................315
Screen zoom-in/zoom-out ..................................................................................................315
Automatic width/height adjustment .....................................................................................315
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
xix
Contents
Symbol Definitions
View properties.................................................................................................................. 316

Page setting ...................................................................................................................... 316
12.6
Special module monitoring .....................................................................317
12.7
Trend monitoring .....................................................................................318
12.8
Data traces ................................................................................................330
12.9
Custom events .........................................................................................343
Configuring trend monitoring ............................................................................................. 318

Start trend monitoring ........................................................................................................ 320
Setting trend graph ............................................................................................................ 322
Setting graph ..................................................................................................................... 323
Setting graph window ........................................................................................................ 325
Graph function ................................................................................................................... 326
Scroll synchronization ....................................................................................................... 326
Connecting to PLC ............................................................................................................ 332

Trace setting...................................................................................................................... 332
Graph settings ................................................................................................................... 335
Trace ................................................................................................................................. 337
Animation .......................................................................................................................... 338
Graph function ................................................................................................................... 339
File function ....................................................................................................................... 339
View function ..................................................................................................................... 341
Overview of custom events ............................................................................................... 343
Event setting...................................................................................................................... 344
Adding custom event item ................................................................................................. 345
Event history...................................................................................................................... 350
13.
DEBUGGING ............................................................................. 355
13.1
Start/stop debugging ...............................................................................355
13.2
LD program debugging ...........................................................................356
13.3
List of break points ..................................................................................362
13.4
Variable break ...........................................................................................363
13.5
Scan break ................................................................................................365
Start debugging ................................................................................................................. 355

Stop debugging ................................................................................................................. 355
Set remove breakpoints .................................................................................................... 356

Go ..................................................................................................................................... 357
Go to cursor....................................................................................................................... 358
Step into, step out and step over functions ....................................................................... 359
Setting variable break ........................................................................................................ 363

Scan break run .................................................................................................................. 366
xx

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
Contents
Symbol Definitions
14.
ONLINE EDITING .......................................................................367
14.1
Online editing sequence ......................................................................... 367
Open project.......................................................................................................................368
Connect ..............................................................................................................................368
Start monitoring ..................................................................................................................368
Start online editing .............................................................................................................368
Edit .....................................................................................................................................369
Write modified program ......................................................................................................369
End online editing ...............................................................................................................369
15.
PRINTING...................................................................................371
15.1
Print project.............................................................................................. 371
15.2
LD program print ..................................................................................... 378
Printing a project ................................................................................................................371

Print setting ........................................................................................................................372
Page setup .........................................................................................................................372
Header/footer setting ..........................................................................................................374
Cover setup ........................................................................................................................375
Print setting ........................................................................................................................378
Print preview ......................................................................................................................380
16.
USER FUNCTION/FUNCTION BLOCK .....................................381
16.1
Overview ................................................................................................... 381
16.2
Create user function/function block ...................................................... 382
16.3
Create user function/function block I/O variable ................................. 383
16.4
User function/function block programming ......................................... 384
16.5
Working with user function/function block .......................................... 386
17.
SOFTMASTER SIMULATOR .....................................................387
17.1
Overview of the SoftMaster simulator (SIM) ......................................... 387
17.2
Program window configuration.............................................................. 391
Features of SoftMaster-SIM ...............................................................................................387

System configuration for execution of SoftMaster-SIM ......................................................387
Starting SoftMaster-SIM .....................................................................................................388
Configuring the program window........................................................................................391

Channel list ........................................................................................................................392
Channel monitor .................................................................................................................393
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
xxi
Contents
Symbol Definitions
I/O condition ...................................................................................................................... 394

I/O condition monitor ......................................................................................................... 406
Module simulation ............................................................................................................. 407
Digital I/O module .............................................................................................................. 409
Analog output module (D/A conversion module) ............................................................... 410
High-speed counter module (HSC Module) ....................................................................... 412
RTD module ...................................................................................................................... 413
Advanced positioning module (APM module) .................................................................... 414
17.3
Limitations ................................................................................................421
Watchdog timer ................................................................................................................. 421

Communication module ..................................................................................................... 421
18.
ST EDITION ............................................................................... 423
18.1
Writing ST program..................................................................................423
18.2
Limit ...........................................................................................................425
18.3
Editing program .......................................................................................425
18.4
Viewing program ......................................................................................430
18.5
Additional edit functions .........................................................................433
Adding scan program ........................................................................................................ 423

Adding user function/function block ................................................................................... 423
Adding SFC transition, action ............................................................................................ 423
Shortcut keys..................................................................................................................... 425

Copy/paste ........................................................................................................................ 426
Undo/redo ......................................................................................................................... 426
Adding/selecting variable .................................................................................................. 427
Inserting function/function block ........................................................................................ 428
ST option ........................................................................................................................... 430

Font/color .......................................................................................................................... 431
Zoom ................................................................................................................................. 431
Tab .................................................................................................................................... 431
Showing line numbers ....................................................................................................... 432
Book mark ......................................................................................................................... 433
Selection from character string list .................................................................................... 434
Selecting member variable from character string list ......................................................... 436
Setting/removing block mask ............................................................................................ 436
Setting/removing line block mask ...................................................................................... 438
Indent/outdent ................................................................................................................... 439
19.
19.1
xxii
EVENT INPUT MODULE ........................................................... 441

Overview ...................................................................................................441
Honeywell
R200
January 2011
Contents
Symbol Definitions
Characteristics of SOE monitor ..........................................................................................441

Functions of the SOE monitor ............................................................................................441
Files created in the SOE monitor .......................................................................................442
19.2
Screen configuration............................................................................... 442
19.3
Basic parameter setting .......................................................................... 447
19.4
I/O parameter setting ............................................................................... 447
19.5
View module information ........................................................................ 452
19.6
Event history monitor ............................................................................. 452
19.7
Save as an excel file ................................................................................ 457
Menu structure ...................................................................................................................443

Tools ..................................................................................................................................445
SOE event history window .................................................................................................446
Status bar ...........................................................................................................................446
Setting items ......................................................................................................................447
Setting item ........................................................................................................................447
Chatter setting ....................................................................................................................450
Example of event filter ........................................................................................................454

Prioritizing events ..............................................................................................................454
Comparing events ..............................................................................................................456
Deleting event history .........................................................................................................456
20.
DEDICATED ML200R FUNCTION .............................................459
20.1
Redundancy parameter........................................................................... 459
20.2
Redundancy PLC state window ............................................................. 462
20.3
Control redundancy ................................................................................ 463
20.4
System monitoring .................................................................................. 465
Change of master CPU ......................................................................................................463

Standby CPU control ..........................................................................................................464
System configuration .........................................................................................................465
Node count change ............................................................................................................466
Base information ...............................................................................................................467
Base changing wizard ........................................................................................................470
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
xxiii
Contents
Symbol Definitions
xxiv

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
1. Introduction
1.1
Features of SoftMaster
SoftMaster is a software tool designed to program and debug the MasterLogic 200 PLC
series. Following are some of the key features of SoftMaster.
Multi-PLC, Multi-Program
Edit, monitor, and manage ML200 PLCs included in a project.
Enables multiple scan programs and task programs
Drag and Drop option
Shortcut Keys
The default shortcut keys provided are customizable.
Message Windows
Easy and convenient editing with Drag and Drop function on most editors such
as Project, Variable/Comment, LD Edit, Variable Monitor, and so on.
Different message windows to edit and check programs.
Convenient Variable/Comment Editing
Option to edit using MS Excel.
Edit option is available through View Variable, View Address, and View Flag.
Auto-fill function to fill similar Variables
Drag and Drop option on the Variable/Comment Windows.
Convenient Program Edit
Unlimited Undo/Redo function.
Block Edit available in cell.
Independent screen-level edit.
Enhanced Find/Replace function.
Block Mask function to prohibit execution in rung.
Bookmark function for access to a specific location in a LD program.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
25
1. Introduction
1.1. Features of SoftMaster
Monitoring Functions
Logging and reading data available if user-defined conditions are met for a
specific address.
Module Changing Wizard
26
Monitoring functions for variable monitoring, address monitoring, system

monitoring, trend monitoring, special module monitoring.
Custom Events
Allows reference to memory of selected address when editing LD.
Easy and safe change of module during PLC RUN.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
1. Introduction
1.2. System requirements
1.2
System requirements
The following are the system requirements of SoftMaster.
Item
Specification
Personal computer and memory
A Pentium computer and 128MB memory
COM port
RS-232C serial port or USB port
Hard disk
At least 100MB or more space.
Monitor
Monitor should have 1024 x 768 and higher

resolution
Operating System
Compatible with Windows XP/Vista/7
ATTENTION
It is recommended to install SoftMaster on Windows XP or Windows Vista or
Windows 7.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
27
1. Introduction
1.2. System requirements
28

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
2. Installation
2.1
Installing SoftMaster
To install SoftMaster, perform the following steps:
Step
1
Action
Double-click the SoftMaster.exe file from the location to execute the
installation.
Installation wizard displays and prepares for installation.
Click Next. The Customer Information page appears.
Type the User Name and name of the Organization.
Click Next. The Destination Folder page appears.

In this page, you can either install in default location or specify the location to
install SoftMaster. Click Change to install in different location. You can
browse and select the required location.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
29
2. Installation
2.1. Installing SoftMaster
Step
5
Action
Click Next. The Ready to Install Program page displays.
Note: SoftMaster needs 30 MB of free disk space. In case of inadequate free
space, you are prompted to select a disk with enough capacity.
Click Install to begin installation. The status bar displays the progress of the
installation.
All the program features selected are installed. Once the SoftMaster is
successfully installed, the InstallShield Wizard Completed page displays.
30
Click Finish to exit from the wizard.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
2. Installation
2.2. Installing the USB device driver
2.2
Installing the USB device driver

If you are installing SoftMaster, you may need to install the USB device driver
separately.
Perform the following steps to install USB Device driver.
ATTENTION
When you install a SoftMaster, a Drivers sub-folder is created under the
folder where SoftMaster is installed and there are two driver files,
GmUSBD.sys and GmUSBD.inf in the Drivers folder. If there is no folder or
driver file, reinstall the SoftMaster.
Step
1
Action
Turn PLC power ON and connect USB device to the PC.
If the connection is established, the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog
box appears.
Click Install from a list or specific location (Advanced) option and then
click Next.
The Search and Installation page displays.
R200
January 2011
Select Search for the best driver in these locations and Include this location in
the search options.
Honeywell
31
2. Installation
Step
Action
Click Browse. The Browse For Folder dialog box displays, select Drivers
folder where SoftMaster is installed.
Click OK. Then, the system searches for the driver files in the selected folder.
When the most suitable device driver is found, system prompts and begins to
install the selected device driver. Since, USB device driver operates stably
based on Windows OS, click Continue Anyway.
Once the device driver is installed completely, the Installation Complete
page displays.
Click Finish to exit from the wizard.
Verifying the USB device driver installation

If USB connection is not available, check the installation status of the device driver as
follows:
Step
1
Action
On the desktop, right-click My Computer and click Manage.
The Computer Management window appears.
32
In the left pane, choose Computer Management (Local) > System Tools >
Device Manager. The items displayed in the right pane may be different
according to the devices installed on the computer.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
2. Installation
Normal case
If the USB device driver for MasterLogic 200 PLC is installed successfully, the
Honeywell MasterLogic Series item appears under Universal Serial Bus Controller as
shown in the following figure.
Abnormal case
If the device driver is not installed successfully, then the Honeywell MasterLogic Series
item does not appear under Universal Serial Bus Controller as shown in the following
figure.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
33
2. Installation
If the USB driver for MasterLogic 200 PLC is not installed successfully, then reinstall
the USB driver for MasterLogic 200 PLC using the following steps.
Step
Action
Right-click the device driver item and click Update Driver from the context
menu.
The Found New Hardware Wizard displays.

Click Installation from a list or specific location (Advanced) option and
then click Next. Then, follow the same steps as in section Installing the USB
device driver.
34

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
3. Basic application
3.1
SoftMaster user interface

The following is an illustration of the SoftMaster user interface. The user interface of
SoftMaster can be described as follows:
UI area
Description
Menu bar: It is the basic menu bar of SoftMaster.
Tool bar: The toolbar below the menu bar contains buttons and
commands to access frequently used tasks.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
35
3.1. SoftMaster user interface
UI area
Description
Project window: Displays the components of the currently open

project.
Variable Monitoring window: Used to register and monitor

variables.
Status bar: Display the status of SoftMaster, the information of the

connected PLC, and so on.
Edit window: Displays the current Edit window.
Message window: Displays messages when the SoftMaster is in

use.
Menu bar
Selecting a menu item displays the options under the menu. Click a menu item and select
an option from the drop-down list of menu options. You can also access the menu using
the shortcut keys.
Project
The following table lists the project menu options with their description:
Menu option
New Project
Creates a new project.
Open Project
Opens an existing project.
Open from PLC
Uploads the project and program stored

in PLC.
Save Project
Saves the project.
Save As
Enables you to save the project with a

different name.
Close Project
Closes the project.
Add Item
36
Description
PLC
Adds a new PLC to the project.
Task
Adds a new task program to the project.
Program
Adds a new scan program to the project.
Function
Adds a new function to the project.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
Menu option
Import Item from

File
Description
Function Block
Adds a new function block to the project.
Data type
Adds a new data type to the project.
PLC
Imports the PLC program from the file.
Global
Variables/Address
Imports global variables/address from the

file.
Program
Imports the program from the file.
I/O parameter
Imports the I/O parameter from the file.
Basic parameter
Imports the basic parameter from the file.
Function/FB
Imports the function/FB from the file.
Export to File
Exports the selected item on the project

window into the file.
Save Variable Names to File
Saves variable names to a file.
Compare Projects
Compares two projects stored in the PC

and displays its result.
Print
Prints the active windows details.
Preview
Displays a preview of the screen to be

printed.
Print Project
Enables selection of a project item for

printing.
Print Setup
Sets the printer options.
Exit
Close the SoftMaster.
Edit
The following table lists the edit menu options with their description.
Menu option
Description
Undo
Cancels the edit on Program Edit

Window to recover its previous status.
Redo
Recovers the edit cancelled using Undo.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
37
Menu option
38
Description
Cut
Copies the selected block to clipboard

and deletes the block.
Copy
Copies the selected block to the

clipboard.
Paste
Copies from the clipboard and pastes on

the Edit window.
Delete
Deletes the selected block or items.
Select All
Selects all block in the currently active

window.
Insert Mode
Changes program edit mode to insert

mode.
Insert Line
Adds a new line to the cursor position.
Delete Line
Deletes the line from the cursor position.
Insert Cell
Adds a cell available to the cursor

position.
Delete Cell
Deletes a cell from the cursor position.
Register Special/Communication Module

Variables
Registers special module variables in

global variables list and deletes previous
list.
Optimize Program
Optimizes the program automatically.
Insert Comment/Label
Inserts a comment or label in the cursor

position.
Set Block Mask
Sets cursor-positioned rung or specified

block area block mask in rung unit.
Remove Block Mask
Removes cursor-positioned rung or

specified block area set in block mask.
Bookmark
Set/Remove
Sets or removes a bookmark.
Remove All
Cancels all the bookmarks specified.
Previous Bookmark
Moves to the previous bookmark.
Next Bookmark
Moves to the next bookmark.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
Menu option
Tools
Description
Edit tools for each program are available.
Find/replace
The following table lists the find/replace menu options with their description.
Menu Option
Description
Find Address
Finds variable address.
Find Text
Searches for variable based on the

variable name.
Replace Address
Replaces variable address with another

address.
Replace Text
Replaces variable name with some other

text.
Find Again
Searches again.
Go To
Step/line
Moves the cursor to the position of a

specific step/line.
Rung comment

specific rung comment.
Label

specific label.
END command
Moves the cursor to the position of END

command.
Previous Message
Moves from the current message window

to the previous message window.
Next Message
Moves from the current message window

to the next message window.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
39
View
The following table lists the view menu options with their description.
Menu
40
Description
IL
Converts to IL View during LD Edit.
Project Window
Shows or hides the project window.
Message Window
Shows or hides the message window.
Variable Monitoring Window
Shows or hides the variable monitor

window.
Instruction Window
Shows or hides the instruction window.
Cross Reference
Displays the used-memory information

on the message windows Cross
Reference tab.
Used Address
Lists all the memory addresses which are

used in the program.
Check Program
Checks the program and displays its

result on the message windows Check
Program tab.
Variables
Displays the variable name in the

program.
Address
Indicates the memory address.
Flags
Indicates default system defined flags.
Address/Variables
Displays the address and the variable in

the program.
Address/Comments
Displays the address and the comment in

the program.
Variables/Comments
Displays the variable and the comment in

the program.
Zoom-In
Magnifies the window.
Zoom-Out
Reduces the window.
Resize Width
Automatically adjusts the cell width to the

string width in the variable/comment
window.
Honeywell
R200
January 2011
Menu
Description
Resize Height
Automatically adjusts the cell height

applicably to the string height in the LD or
variable/comment window.
Full Screen
Enlarges the program window or

variable/comment window applicably to
the whole screen.
Properties
Displays the registered information of the

selected item on the project window.
LD Properties
Displays the LD properties in the

program.
Change Columns
Increase or decrease the columns in the

program screen.
Open Local Variables
Converts from the program screen to the

local variable screen.
Open User Function
Opens the user-defined program.
Open Program
Converts from the local variable screen

to the program screen.
Online
The following table lists the online menu options with their description.
Menu
Description
Connect/Disconnect
Connects or disconnects with PLC.
Connection Settings
Specifies the connection method.
Change Mode
Run
Changes PLC mode.
Stop
Debug
Read
Reads parameter/program/comment from PLC.
Write
Writes parameter/program/comment on PLC.
Compare with PLC
Compares the project to the project saved in

PLC.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
41
Menu
42
Description
Set Flash Memory
Copies the program into PLC flash memory if

enabled.
Reset PLC
Resets PLC.
Clear PLC
Deletes parameter/program/comment saved in

PLC.
PLC Information
Displays PLC information.
PLC History
Displays PLC history.
PLC Errors/Warnings
Displays PLC error/warning information.
I/O Information
Displays PLC I/O information
Save PLC History
Saves PLC history
Force I/O
Displays the window for compulsory I/O

setting.
Skip I/O
Displays the window for I/O skip setting.
Fault Mask
Displays the window for fault mask setting.
Module Changing Wizard
Displays the dialog window to change the

modules.
Base Changing Wizard
Changes base while PLC is operating.
Start Online Editing
Displays the dialog box to edit the program

online when the PLC is running.
Write Modified Program
Displays the dialog box to download the edited

program online when the PLC is running. The
modified program gets activated online.
End Online Editing
This ends the online editing session and the

program comes back to normal operation.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
Monitor
The following table lists the monitor menu options with their description.
Menu
Description
Start/Stop Monitoring
Starts or stops the monitor.
Pause
Temporarily stops the monitor.
Resume
Restarts the monitor temporarily stopped.
Pausing Conditions
Specifies conditions for the monitor

temporary stop.
Change Current Value
Specifies the address value being

monitored.
System Monitoring
Executes the system monitor.
Address Monitoring
Execute the address monitor window

which shows all memory area addresses.
Special Module Monitoring
Executes the special module monitor.
Trend Monitoring
Executes the trend monitor.
PID Monitoring
Monitors all or individual PID block.
SOE Monitoring
Monitors the events which are entered

into the CPU and the event input
modules.
Custom Events
Specifies the custom events.
Data Traces
Specifies the address to monitor the

change of the data.
Debug
The following table lists the debug menu options with their description.
Menu
Description
Start/Stop Debugging
Converts debug mode to Start/Stop

Debugging.
Go
Runs to the break point.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
43
Menu
Description
Step Over
Runs step by step.
Step Into
Debugs the subroutine.
Step Out
Escapes from the subroutine.
Go to Cursor
Runs to the cursor position.
Set/Remove Breakpoints
Sets or cancels the break point.
Breakpoints List
Displays the list of the break points

specified.
Breakpoint Conditions
Specifies the break conditions.
Tools
The following table lists the tools menu options with their description.
Menu
Description
Network Manager
Shows the PLC network and specifies

the parameter.
Start/End Simulator
Starts or ends the simulator.
Customize
Enables to set tools and options.
Shortcut Settings
User specifies the shortcut keys.
Options
Enables to customize the SoftMaster

environment as per the user preference.
Create Host ID
This creates the host ID file. Host ID is

required to get the license.
Window
The following table lists the window menu options with their description.
Menu
44
Description
New Window
Opens a new window on the active

window.
Split
Splits the Project window.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
Menu
Description
Cascade
Arranges the several windows of

SoftMaster in steps.
Tile Horizontally

SoftMaster horizontally.
Tile Vertically

SoftMaster vertically.
Arrange Icons
Arranges the icons of SoftMaster.
Close All
Closes all the windows of SoftMaster.
Help
The following table lists the help menu options with their description.
Instruction
Description
SoftMaster Help
Opens Help for SoftMaster application.
Instruction Help
Opens Help for PLC instructions.
About SoftMaster
Displays SoftMaster information.
Tool bar
SoftMaster provides shortcut icons for frequently used menus on the tool bar. Click the
required tool to execute.
Creating a custom tool bar

Perform the following steps to create a custom tool bar.
Step
1
Action
Click Tools > Customize.
The Customize dialog box displays.
Select the tool bars to show/hide.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
45
Step
2
Action
Click New.
The New Toolbar dialog box displays.
Type a name for the new tool bar.
Click OK to create a tool bar with no tools.
Filling the tool box

This menu is used to populate the tool box created with custom tools. Perform the
following steps to fill the tool box.
Step
Action
Select the Command tab on the Customize dialog box.
Select the menus that you want as a part of the new tool bar.
Click OK to create the new tool bar.
Status display line

As depicted in the following illustration, the Status Display line is used to display the
following:
46
Legend
Description
Tool tip of
selected toolbar
item
Used to display the comment of the selected menu, instruction or

mouse-positioned tool box.
Name of the
PLC
Indicates the name of the selected PLC name. If a project has

several PLCs, online-related instructions are applied to the PLC
displayed here (Example: New PLC).
PLC Mode
display
Used to display the PLC mode. If several PLCs are in a project,

the selected PLCs mode is displayed (Example: Run).
Honeywell
R200
January 2011
3.2. Edit functions
Legend
Description
Warning Display
Indicates the error status in the PLC (Example: R1, Ethernet,

OK).
Cursor Position
Indicates the cursor position when a program is edited (Example:

Row 9, Column 5).
Mode
Indicates the insert mode or overwrite mode.
Change view window

All the windows (such as project window, result window, and so on.) available in view
menu are composed of docking windows. Use the mouse to adjust the position and the
size of the windows or to hide the windows.
Change to open window
Right-click the window and choose Float In Main Window from the context menu.
Hide
Right-click on a window and choose Hide from the context menu.
3.2
Edit functions
These functions are available in LD, IL, Variable/Comment, Variable Monitor, and
Project Window. Variable/Comment and Excel can share the edited details with each
other.
Cutpaste
Cut > Paste menu is used to move the data of the selected area to a new position to paste
the data on.
Copypaste
Copy > Paste menu is used to create data identical to the data of the selected area. In
case the variable name is duplicated as described in Variable/Comment, an applicable
warning message appears. For more details refer to the comment of each edit window.
Drag and drop
Drag and Drop is used to apply either Cut > Paste or Copy > Paste. When dragging and
dropping in a same area such as same LD or IL window, it applies Cut > Paste; if
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
47
3.3. Shortcut keys
dragging and dropping with two and more SoftMaster Program instances opened, it
applies Copy > Paste.
TIP
Cut, Copy and Paste can be also controlled by the context menu in Edit
window.
Copy/Paste in Variable/Comment or LD/IL Edit is verified for the duplication

by the program. However, it should be also checked manually by a user.
Program does not respond if Cut, Copy or Paste is operated in an

unavailable area.
Cut, Copy or Paste from/to different areas may cause fatal program errors.
Auto conversion function is not provided when Cut, Copy or Paste is

attempted from/to different areas. Therefore, a user should check the
pasted area.
Zooming in/zooming out

This function is used for magnifying or reducing the edit window. The applicable
magnification rate changes by a minimum of 5% within the range of 50% ~ 200%.
To zoom-in/zoom-out, select View > Zoom In or View > Zoom Out on the menu as
necessary or use the combo box to select or enter a specific magnification rate or press
Ctrl and use the mouse wheel to adjust magnification rate.
48

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
3.3. Shortcut keys
3.3
Shortcut keys
Configuring shortcut keys

Shortcut keys can be specified for all the instructions. When you set new shortcut keys
for a task the existing shortcut key is deleted.
Perform the following steps to set the shortcut key for an instruction:
Step
1
Action
Click Tools > Shortcut Settings. The Shortcut Keys window displays.
Field Label
Description
Select a macro
Used to select the menu to specify its

shortcut key on the list.
Create Shortcut
Used to create a shortcut key for the selected

menu.
Remove
Deletes the specified shortcut key.
Reset All
Deletes all the shortcut keys specified and

resets all to default.
From the Select a macro list, select the menu to specify its shortcut key.
Click Create Shortcut. The Assign Shortcut window displays.
Set the shortcut key. For example, to apply Alt + Z, press Alt and Z on the
keyboard. A shortcut key is displayed on the Edit Window. If this key
association is already used, a menu applicable to the specified shortcut key is
displayed.
Click OK to save the shortcut.
Shortcut keys
Shortcut Keys
Comment
Home
Used to move to the starting point in the row.
End
Used to move to the end of the row.
Ctrl + Home
Used to move to the first cell position.
Ctrl + End
Used to move to the last cell position.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
49
3.3. Shortcut keys
Shortcut Keys
Shift + Ctrl + Home
To select from the current to the previous cells.
Shift + Ctrl + End
To select from the current to the last cells.
Shift + Page Up
To select from the cell to the page up position.
Shift + Page Down
To select from the cell to the page down position.
Shift + Tab,
Used to move to the next cell (right->left, bottom->top),

and to move to the last cell in the first row.
Shift + Enter
50
Comment
Tab, Enter
Used to move to the next cell (left->right, top->bottom).

A new line is created after the last row.
Ctrl + Enter
Multi-line is entered in the comment column.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
3.4. Customizing SoftMaster
3.4
Customizing SoftMaster
This function enables you to configure the default folder for storing projects, to set a
common editor, and configure the font/color for LD, SFC, and ST.
3
1.
Category: Enables to configure the default folder for storing projects, to set a
common editor, and configure the font/color for LD, SFC, and ST.
2.
Contents: If you select a particular category, it displays contents for the

corresponding category.
3.
Buttons: These buttons are used to apply the setting, cancel the setting, to reset all
the setting, and to exit from options window.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
51
Configuring SoftMaster options

Perform the following steps to configure custom options for SoftMaster.
Step
Action
Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays.
Select SoftMaster in the Option window.

The following table provides a brief description of SoftMaster settings.
Field Label
52
Description
Default folder for new

projects
Location where the new project is created.

By default, the location is C:\SoftMaster\.
You can also set the location where the
new project has to be created.
Select Folder
Searches the required folder where the

new project has to be created.
Number of backup file(s)
Sets the backup file number to restore the

project file. You can set up to a maximum
of 20.
Number of recent projects to

display
Sets the number of recently opened

project file. You can set up to a maximum
of 20. Click Project > Recent Project to
view the recently opened projects.
Open previous project when

starting the SoftMaster.
If you select this option, SoftMaster

automatically opens the last file used
when SoftMaster starts.
Integrated connection and

file with SoftMaster-NM
If you select this option, when executing

SoftMaster-NM through SoftMaster menu,
make a connection option of SoftMaster
and PLC name displayed at SoftMasterNM.
Click OK.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
Setting common editor

Perform the following steps to display the common editor.
Step
Action
Select Common Editor in the Option window and select the options you
want to change.
The following table provides a brief description of common editor settings.
Field Label
R200
January 2011
Description
Output cross
reference instantly
If you select this option then when editing the

LD program, displays automatically the cross
reference contents for the selected address.
When this option is not selected, select View >
Cross Reference and check the memory
usage result.
Check duplicated coil

instantly
If you select this option it checks the duplicated

coils during editing and displays it in the result
window.
Instant input mode
If you select this option then when the user

enters some contact, the address input window
for the user to enter the address displays.
When this option is not selected, then the user
double-clicks the contact or presses Enter with
cursor on the contact to edit it.
Show line numbers
Displays line number.
Show grid
Displays grid.
Click OK.

Honeywell
53
SoftMaster font/color option

This option enables to change font/color used in the editing window. You can also set the
font color for LD, SFC, and ST.
Perform the following steps to change the font/color.
Step
Action
Select Font/Color in the Option window and select the options you want to
change.
The following table provides a brief description of font and color settings.
Field Label
Description
Items
The items that you want to change the

font/color.
Font
It is activated when the item is Text font. It

designates text font.
Color
It is activated when item is not Text font. It

designates color.
Default
Restore the default value.
Preview
Displays the current setting status.
Click OK.
SoftMaster online option

This option enables you to specify the SoftMaster online-related options.
Perform the following steps to specify the online-related options.
Step
Action
Select Online in the Option window.

Type: Sets monitor display type of data value.
Example: If you select hexadecimal, variable is displayed as hexadecimal
number when monitoring.
54

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
Step
Action
Type
Example function block ADD
Unsigned
decimal
Signed
decimal
Hexadecimal
As instruction
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
55
Step
Action
As variable
View connection settings when connecting: Display automatically the

specified details of the connection with PLC when connected. If you select
this option then the following dialog box appears whenever PLC is connected.
Show Message when changing the PLC mode: When changing the PLC,
select this option to display the conversion message automatically. When
changing stop mode to run mode, the following message displays.
Contrary, when changing run mode to stop mode, the following message
displays.
56

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
Step
Action
Configuring LD option
This option enables you to can change text and column width of LD editor.
Perform the following steps to display the LD option.
Step
Action
Select LD from the Options window.

The following table provides a brief description of LD settings.
Field Label
R200
January 2011
Description
Display above text
When displaying text above diagram, you

can decide whether to display height of
text as variable type according to the
number of character or as fixed type
according to setting.
Display below text
When displaying text below diagram, you

can decide whether to display height of
text as variable type according to the
number of character or as fixed type
according to setting.
Display
Specified column width of LD diagram.
Click OK.

Honeywell
57
LD font/color option
This option enables you to can change the Font/Color used in LD editor.
Perform the following steps, to set the LD font/color option.
Step
Action
Select Font/Color in LD category and select the options you want to change.
Field Label
Description
Items

font/color.
Font

Color

designates color.
Default
Restores the default value for the selected

item.
Preview
Displays the setting value of the selected

item.
Click OK.
Configuring SFC option

This option is used when editing SFC program.
Perform the following steps to display the SFC option.
Step
58
Action
Select SFC from the Options window.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
Step
Action
The following table provides a brief description of SFC settings.
Field Label
Description
Show comment
Shows comment of step, transition, action

and block.
Show print area
Shows printable area with the thick dotted

line.
Show page number
Shows page number in printable area
Step column width
Specifies column width of step, transition.
Action column width
Specifies column width of action.
Utilize SFC split window
You can use SFC split window.
Split window position
Decides split widow position.
Split window contents
Decides which content to display.
ATTENTION
Range of step column width is 20~200.
Range of action column width is 70~400.
Click OK.
SFC font/color option

This option enables you to change font/color used in SFC editor.
Perform the following steps to set the SFC font/color option.
Step
Action
Select Font/Color in SFC category and select the options you want to
change.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
59
Step
Action
Field Label
Description
Items

font/color.
Font

Color

designates color.
Default
Restores default value for selected item.
Preview

item.
Click OK.
Configuring ST option
This option is used in editing ST program.
Perform the following steps to display the ST option.
Step
Action
Select ST from the Options window.

The following table provides a brief description of ST settings.
Field Label
60
Description
Parameter information
Provides parameter information, exclusive

of 2MLK CPU.
Auto list members
When you enter character with keyboard,

it shows instruction and variable starting
with the entered character.
Auto macro statement
When you enter control statement such as

IF, WHILE, SWITCH and press Enter, it
completes the statement according to ST
grammar.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
Step
Action
Tab size
Specifies space length when you press

Tab key.
Auto indent
When you change line with Enter key, it

indents automatically as many as previous
tab size.
Enhance
Shows character string with diverse color

according to variable, reserved word,
comment, and instruction.
Click OK.
ST font/color option
This option enables you to can change Font/Color used in ST editor.
Perform the following steps, to set the ST font/color option.
Step
Action
Select Font/Color in ST category and select the options you want to change.
Field Label
R200
January 2011
Description
Items

font/color
Font

Color

designates color.
Default
Restore default value for selected item.
Preview

item.
Click OK.

Honeywell
61
62

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
4. Project Configuration
4.1
Overview of project configuration
Project configuration window

The following are the components of the project configuration window.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
63
4.1. Overview of project configuration
Legend
Item Name
Description
Project
Used to specify the whole system. Several

related PLCs can be included in one project.
PLC
Displays the system applicable to a CPU

module.
Global/Direct Variables
Global variable declaration and direct variable

text can be edited and viewed.
Parameter
Used to specify the details on operation and

configuration of PLC system.
Basic Parameters
Used to specify the basic operation.
I/O Parameters
Used to specify the I/O module configuration.
User Data type
Defines the structure type.
Scan Program
Used as the folder for all the programs.
New program
Folder for local variables and user written scan

programs.
Scan Program 2
Folder for local variables and user written scan

programs.
Task1
User-defined task with a fixed cycle.
Task Program1
Folder for local variables and user written task

programs.
User function/function
block
Custom function/function block created by the

user.
Function1
Folder for local variables and user written

functions.
TIP
A project can include several PLCs. This way, SoftMaster can be used to
conveniently manage and monitor several PLCs simultaneously.
64

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
4.2. Project management
4.2
Project management
Creating a new project

This option enables you to create a new project. A folder with a name identical to the
project name is created and the project file is saved in this folder.
Step
1
Action
Click Project > New Project. The New Project window displays.
The following table provides a brief description about New Project window
fields.
Field Label
Description
Project name
You can enter the project name, which is the

name of the project file. The extension of the
project file is xgp.
File directory
A folder with the name identical to the project

name as specified by the user when created
and the project file is stored in this folder.
Select Folder
Browse to select a folder to store the project

file.
PLC series
Select ML-200, ML-50, ML-200 IEC, or ML200R as the PLC type.
CPU type
Select the type of CPU
Program name
Enter the name of a program included in the

project.
Program language
Select the program language as LD, SFC, or

ST.
Project description
Enter a description for the project.
TIP
When you create a new project, it is stored in a folder with a name that is
identical to the project name. The extension of .xgp is automatically attached
to the project file if it is not specified.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
65
4.2. Project management
Opening the project

Perform the following steps to open an existing project.
Step
Action
Click Project > Open Project. The Open dialog box displays.
Select a Project and click Open.

Note: When you select a project, the user-defined comment appears in the
comment section of the dialog box. This helps in selecting projects.
Opening a project from PLC

This option enables you to create a new project, by reading the project stored in PLC. If
the project is already open in SoftMaster, the project is closed to create a new project.
Perform the following steps to create a new project.
Step
Action
Click Project > Open from PLC. The Online Settings window displays.
Select an object to connect and click OK.

For details on connection settings, refer to Connect Options in Online
functions.
A new project is created.
TIP
Click Project > Save Project to save the project read from the PLC in
the PC.
Click Online > Read to read the items of PLC and to import to the
currently open Project.
Saving a project
This option enables you to save changes in a project.
To save a Project, on the menu bar, click Project > Save Project.
66

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
4.3. Project item
TIP
If items in the project have changed and need to be saved, * displays
beside the project name in the Project Window.
Saving project as
This option enables you to save the project in a different file name.
Perform the following steps to save the project, with a different file name:
Step
Action
Click Project > Save As. The Save As window displays.
Enter a new project file name and select a folder, where you want to save the
project file.
The following table provides a brief description about Save As window fields.
Field Label
3
R200
January 2011
Description
File name
You can enter the name of the project. The

project file is stored in this name. The extension
of the project file is .xgp.
File directory
The last saved file path displays for saving the

current file. In case you save it for first time, the
default folder name displays which is identical to
the name of the project.
Select Folder
Browse to select a folder to store the project file.
Click OK.
Honeywell
67
4.3. Project item
4.3
Project item
Add item
You can add a PLC, task, and program into the project.
Perform the following steps to add PLC.
Step
Action
On the Project Window, select the Project Item.
Click Project > Add Item >PLC. The PLC window displays.
Type the PLC name and PLC description and select PLC type from the dropdown list. Click OK to create a new PLC.
TIP
SoftMaster allows the user to specify the project and to include several PLCs
in one project for convenient program management.
68

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
4.3. Project item
Add task
Perform the following steps to add a task.
Step
Action
On the Project Window, select the PLC Item.
Click Project > Add Item > Task. The Task window displays.
Type the Task name, Task number and select Priority, Execution Condition.
Click OK to create a new Task.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
69
4.3. Project item
Step
Action
The following table provides a brief description about Task window fields.
Field Label
70
Description
Task name
You can enter the name of the task. The

name must not include special
characters.
Priority
Used to specify the priority of the tasks.

A lower figure indicates a higher priority.
Lower the figure, higher is the priority.
Task number
It is a unique number used to identify

and manage the tasks in PLC. The Task
number can change based on the
Execution condition (For Example, Fixed
Cycle: 0 ~ 31)
Execution condition
Used to specify the execution condition

under which the task is executed.
Internal address execution

condition
Setting items are different according to

the type of internal address.
Address
Used to enter the address which is used

as the start condition of task program.
Enter BIT or WORD address according
to the condition to execute the task
program.
Word address start condition
The start condition is specified if WORD

type of the internal address start
condition is selected.
Bit address start condition
The start condition is specified if BIT type

of the internal address start condition is
selected.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
4.3. Project item
TIP
Execution condition may be different according to the PLC type.
Initialization: The initialization task is executed when the PLC mode

is changed from STOP to RUN. It is executed until the _INIT_DONE
(F10250) Flag is ON. And while the initialization task is executed, the
programs (including the Scan Program) which belong to other tasks
is not executed.
Fixed Cycle: The task is executed at the specified intervals of time.

Enter the time in ms unit.
External contact point: The task is executed if specified external

contact point is ON. The relative external address should be entered.
For example, %P00016.
Internal address: The task is executed based on the status of

internal address. The setup item is different according to the type of
internal address.
REFERENCE - INTERNAL
For additional information on the operation and details of the task, see 2MLK
CPU manual.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
71
4.3. Project item
Adding a program
Perform the following steps to add a Program.
Step
Action
On the Project Window, select the program location to add. The program
can be added to Scan Program or Task Item.
Click Project > Add Item > Program. The Program window displays.
Type the Program Name, Program Description, and select language. Click
OK to create a program.
Exporting to file
The following items can be saved as separate item files.
Item
72
File Extension
PLC
plc
Global/direct variables
gdv
I/O parameter
iop
Basic parameter
bsp
Program
prg
Use function/function block
fun

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
4.3. Project item
Exporting PLC configuration

Perform the following steps to export a PLC.
Step
Action
On the Project Window, select the PLC item.
Click Project > Export to File > PLC. The Open dialog box displays.
Enter the file name and then click OK.
Exporting variable/comment
Perform the following steps to export a variable/comment.
Step
Action
On the Project Window, select the variable/comment item.
Click Project > Export to File > Variable/Comment. The Open dialog box
displays.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
73
4.3. Project item
Exporting I/O parameters

Perform the following steps to export I/O parameters.
Step
Action
On the Project Window, select the I/O parameter item.
Click Project > Export to File > I/O Parameter. The Open dialog box
displays.
Exporting basic parameters

Perform the following steps to export basic parameters.
Step
Action
On the Project Window, select the basic parameter item.
Click Project > Export to File > Basic Parameter. The Open dialog box
displays.
Exporting a program
Perform the following steps to export a program.
Step
Action
On the Project Window, select the program item.
Click Project > Export to File > Program. The Open dialog box displays.
TIP
74
Items can be easily copied or moved between the projects using the
Drag and Drop function.
Drag and Drop function is available between projects, when two

SoftMaster projects are open.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
4.3. Project item
Importing from file

The following components can be saved as separate files and can be replaced by saved
files.
Item
File extension
PLC
plc
Global/direct variables
gdv
I/O parameter
iop
Basic parameter
bsp
Program
prg
User function/function block
fun
Imports item from saved item files. The contents from PLC, program is inserted into the
project. Variable/comment, basic parameter, I/O parameter, and so on is overwritten on
the previous item.
TIP
Since variable/comment, basic parameters, and I/O parameters are
overwritten on the existing items; the content of the existing item is deleted.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
75
4.3. Project item
Importing a PLC CPU configuration

Perform the following steps to import a PLC CPU configuration.
Step
Action
Click Project > Import Item from File > PLC. The Open dialog box displays.
Select the file and then click OK.
Importing variable/comment
Perform the following steps to import variable/comment.
Step
76
Action
On the Project Window, select the variable/comment item.
Click Project > Import Item from File > Global Variables/Address. The
Open dialog box displays.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
4.3. Project item
Importing I/O parameter

Perform the following steps to import an I/O parameter.
Step
Action
On the Project Window, select the I/O parameter item.
Click Project > Import Item from File > I/O Parameter. The Open dialog
box displays.
Select the file and click OK.
Importing basic parameter

Perform the following steps to import basic parameter.
Step
Action
On the Project Window, select the basic parameter item.
Click Project > Import Item from File > Basic Parameter. The Open dialog
box displays.
Importing a program
Perform the following steps to import a program,
Step
Action
On the Project Window, select the program location to add. The program
can be added to Scan Program or Task Item.
Click Project > Import Item from File > Program. The Open dialog box
displays.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
77
4.3. Project item
Project properties
Perform the following steps to view the project properties,
Step
Action
On the Project Window, select the Project item.
Click View > Properties. The item window displays.
The following table provides a brief description about the fields.

Field Label
78
Description
Project name
Displays the project name, which

can be changed as necessary.
Project description
Displays the project description,

which can be changed as
necessary.
File name
Displays the file name where the

project is saved. To save as a
different file: click Project > Save
As.
After the change, click OK.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
4.3. Project item
Viewing/editing changing PLC properties

Perform the following steps to view the properties of a PLC.
Step
Action
Click View > Properties. The PLC window displays.
Make the required changes and click OK.
Viewing/editing task properties

Perform the following steps to view task properties.
Step
Action
On the Project Window, select a task item.
Click View > Properties. The Task window displays.
Viewing/editing program information

Perform the following steps to view Program properties.
Step
Action
On the Project Window, select a program item.
Click View > Properties. The Program window displays.
Changing program execution sequence

Scan and Task program is executed from the priority in regular sequence.
Thus, the program location is changed to alter the execution sequence.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
79
4.3. Project item
Changing the order of execution

Perform the following steps to change the order of execution.
Step
Action
Select a program.
Right-click on the selected program and select Move Up (Program) or Move

Down (Program) from the context menu.
Comparing projects
Two projects can be compared with respect to specific items. The Result window
displays the compared results.
Perform the following steps to compare two projects.
Step
80
Action
Click Project > Compare Projects. The Compare Projects window

displays.
In the Compare Projects window, click Open Project.
Select the project file to compare.
Select the items to compare with. The selected items of both projects should
be identical.
Click Compare. The Result window displays the compared results.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
4.4. Project password
4.4
Project password
Setting project password

You can specify the password for a project file. This function prevents other users from
opening the project file. This project file password bears no relation with the PLC
password. Password can have a maximum of 8 characters.
ATTENTION
You will not be able to open the project file if you forget the password.
Perform the following steps to set a password for a project.

Step
Action
On the Project Window, select the Project.
Click View > Properties. The Project window displays.
In the Project window, select the Password tab.
Enter the password in the Password field in the New password section.
Re-enter the password in Confirm password field.
Click OK.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
81
4.4. Project password
Changing password
Perform the following steps to change password.
Step
Action
Enter the previous password in Password field in the Previous password

section.
Enter the new password in Password field in the New password section.
Re-enter the password in Confirm password field.
Click OK.
Deleting password
Perform the following steps to delete password.
Step
82
Action
Enter the password in Password field.
Click Delete button to delete the password.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
5. Variables
5.1
Overview of variables
Use of variables is program dependent. In general, global variable is available in every
program. To use a global variable as a local variable, it is necessary to declare it as
EXTERN before use. Local variable is available only in a designated program. Direct
variable (variables with user specified address) can be used in the program. In addition, a
comment can be entered to the direct variable.
5.2
Global/direct variable
Global/direct variables consist of global variables, direct variable comments, and flags. A
global variable declares the variable to be used for a program or displays a list of the
declared variables, based on the available variables. Direct variable comment declares the
direct variable comment available in a program or displays the comment. The flag
displays a list of flags provided by the declaration. The following are the different types
of flags:
System flag
High-speed link flag
P2P flag
PID flag.
Global variable
Global variables are declared and the list displays as in the following figure.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
83
5. Variables
5.2. Global/direct variable
Direct variable comments

It displays the comment of a direct variable entered or declared for the variables.
a)
Direct variable: if entering a variable, it displays the data of the direct

variable comment.
TIP
Direct variable varies depending on CPU type.
Flag
84

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
5. Variables
5.2. Global/direct variable
The following table provides a description of the Flag window.

Field Label
Description
Flag kind
You can select the type of flag (System, HS link, P2P and PID).
All
Used to display the entire list of flags selected from Flag kind. In case of system
flag, all the details are displayed on the window. If All is not selected, only the flag
applicable to the Parameter number and Block index displays.
Parameter
number
This is active only for High-speed link, P2P and PID flag. Only the flag item of the
input parameter number displays. (For example, if parameter number 1 is entered;
the flag number displays as shown in the following figure.)
Block index
This is active only for high-speed link and P2P flag. Only the flag item of the input
block index displays. (For example, if block index 120 is entered; it is as shown in
the following figure.)
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
85
5. Variables
5.3. Global/direct variable edit
5.3
Global/direct variable edit

You can edit the variable kind, variable name, memory address, initial value, retain, used
status, and comment of a variable currently declared as a global/direct variable. In
addition, a new global variable can be added to the list of the global/direct variables.
Global/direct variable registration

Register the global/direct variables to use it in a program. In order to register the list of
global/direct variables, refer to section Register as global variable.
Register as global variable
A variable can be added to the list of global variables, modified or deleted from it.
Field Label
Description
Variable kind
VAR_GLOBAL and VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT are available.
Variable name
The declared variable cannot be duplicated.

A number is not allowed as the first character.
A special character is not allowed. (However, _ is available.)
Space is not allowed as a character.
A direct variable with the same name is not allowed (that is, MX0,
WB0)
If a line is empty, BOOL is displayed as the default type when entering
a variable.
Type
23 types of variables are available; 20 basic types and 3 derived types.

Basic type(20):
86

Honeywell
BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, LWORD,

R200
January 2011
5. Variables
Field Label
Description
SINT, INT, DINT, LINT, USINT, UINT,
UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME,
DATE, TIME_OF_DAY,
DATE_AND_TIME, STRING
Derived type(3):
ARRAY (that is, ARRAY[0..6,0..2,0..4] OF

BOOL) => limit (up to third), STRUCT(that
is, STRUCT name display) => STRUCT
type is not available in STRUCT,
FB_INST(that is, FB name display)
Memory address
Indicates the memory address that can be entered using the direct
variable (I, Q, M, R, W).
Initial value
Indicates the default value that can be set.
Retain
Indicates if memory address is set, retain column is inactive.

R, W:
Always retain area.
M:
Setting as per basic parameter information.
I, Q:
Always not retain area.
Used
Indicates whether to use a declared variable.
Comment
Allows entry of a comment. Use Ctrl + Enter key to enter multi line
comments.
Line validity
To register on global variable window, it needs variable kind, variable

name, and variable type.
An incomplete entry in a global variable window is highlighted in pink.
TIP
An error that occurs when editing a cell is highlighted in pink. Press ESC key
to recover the previous value during the cell edit.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
87
5. Variables
Registering special/communication module variables

The registering special module variables function is used to register variables of the
respective module by referring to the special module information specified in I/O
parameter. The variable and the comment can be modified.
Perform the following steps to register special/communication module variables:
Step
Action
Set the special module on the slot in I/O parameter.
Select Global Variables/Address in the project window.
Select Global Variable tab in the Global Variable/Address window.
Click Edit > Register Special/Communication Module Variables.
TIP
Registering Special Module Variables removes existing registered entries and
re-registers with the newly specified I/O parameters.
Copy, cut, delete, and paste

Copy, cut, delete or paste can be executed to edit the list of global/direct variables used in
the program.
Copy
Copy is used to save the data of a selected area in the clipboard. The copied details can
be pasted to the current project or other projects. You can also paste in other applications.
Perform the following steps to copy the data to the windows clipboard.
88

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
5. Variables
Step
Action
Select the area to copy.
Click Edit > Copy.
TIP
To select the area,
Use the mouse to select the cell of (0,0) in order to select the whole
table
Click Edit > Select All in order to select the whole table.
Use the mouse to select the column header of the cell in order to
select the whole columns.
Use the mouse to select the row header of the cell in order to select
the whole rows.
Use the mouse to drag the part of the cell in order to select the area.
Use Shift + Arrow keys on the keyboard in order to select the area
Delete
Delete is used to delete the data of a selected area from the list of global/direct variables.
Perform the following steps to delete data of a selected area.
Step
Action
Select the area to delete.
Click Edit > Delete.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
89
5. Variables
Cut
Cut is used to save the selected data in the clipboard in order to add to the current project
or other projects. Unlike Copy, Cut deletes the selected data from the original area.
Perform the following steps to cut the data and save it in windows clipboard.
Step
Action
Select the area to cut.
Click Edit > Cut.
Paste
Paste option enables the pasting of cut or copied data (saved on the clipboard) in the
selected position. If the data is already copied, a dialog box displays to select and change
the data.
If the data saved in the clipboard is a part of columns,
To paste the data to a specified location:

Step
90
Action
Select the position to paste on.
Click Edit > Paste.
If the variable and direct variable are identical on the list of

variables/comments, the following dialog box displays.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
5. Variables
a)
Number: used to display the duplicated number of the variables and direct
variables to paste.
b)
Replace: used to apply paste.
c)
Gray Line: used to display the existing list of variables/comments, which is

not edited.
d)
White Line: used to display the list of variables/comments obtained from the
clipboard, which is not edited.
e)
OK: applies the lines selected. The existing list of variables/comments is

deleted to add a new list of variables/comments.
f)
Cancel: The existing list of variables/comments is not deleted, and a new the
list of variables/comments is not applied accordingly.
g)
Select All: used to select all in the Replace column.
h)
Unselect All: used to cancel all the selections in the Replace column.
If the data saved in the clipboard is of the partial column.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
91
5. Variables
To paste the data to a specified location:

Step
92
Action
Select the position to paste.
Click Edit >Paste.
If the variable and direct variable are identical on the list of

variables/comments, the following dialog box displays.
a)
Number: Used to display the duplicated number of the variables and direct
variables to paste.
b)
Replace: Used to apply paste.
c)
Gray Line: Used to display the data in the existing cell, which is not edited.
d)
White Line: If the variable or address of the data to paste is duplicated, it is

automatically increased and then displayed on the window. In addition, the
cell can be edited.
e)
Select All: Used to select all in the Replace column.
f)
Unselect All: Used to cancel all the selections in the Replace column.
Honeywell
R200
January 2011
5. Variables
TIP
If all items are identical, the cell cannot be edited, while if partially
identical, the cell can be edited.
If the number of the columns saved in the clipboard is greater than

the number of the columns to paste, it is not possible to paste.
If the data saved in the clipboard is greater than the number of the lines
to paste, it is not possible to paste.
Paste in View Direct Variable Comment regards the data saved in the
clipboard as partial columns.
Paste is not available in Flag but in other Excel program.
Changing variable name

Perform the following steps to change the variable name.
Step
Action
On the Project Window, double-click Global Variables/Address. The list of

all global variables is listed.
Click the header of the Serial Number column to select the entire list of
variables.
Click Edit > Cut or right-click and choose Cut from the menu.
Paste the variables into an Excel sheet.
Make necessary changes to the variable names.
Right click on the header of the Serial Number column and choose Paste.
ATTENTION
Do not re-register the special modules.
Insert line
Insert line is used to insert new lines in the selected area. Inserting a line pushes down the
existing lines.
Perform the following steps to insert new lines.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
93
5. Variables
Step
Action
Select a line before which you want to insert a line.
Click Edit > Insert Line. A line is inserted above the selected line.
TIP
If no cell is selected, one line is added to the first line.
Press Enter or Tab to create a new line at the end of the last line.
It is available only in the Global Variable window.
Delete line
Delete line is used to delete the lines in a selected area. Perform the following steps to
delete existing lines.
Step
Action
Select a line.
Click Edit > Delete Line. The line is deleted
ATTENTION
Delete Line is not executed If no cell is selected.
Drag and drop

Drag and drop is used to drag selected items and paste in a different position. Perform the
following steps to drag and drop the selected items.
Step
Action
Select the area to drag and drop.
The mouse cursor changes to the state available for drag and drop.
Keep the left mouse button pressed and drag and drop the selected items in
a position to paste it.
Drag and drop is available on the Variable Monitoring Window, LD Window, Data
Traces window, Global Variable window of other SoftMaster programs and Direct
Variable Comment window of other SoftMaster programs.
94

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
5. Variables
Copy is available when drag and drop is executed in the Excel program.
ATTENTION
Data does not move but is copied when dragged and dropped
Paste is not available in Flag.
Export to file
Export to file is used to save the previously declared list of global variables in a file that
can be subsequently opened and read from external programs.
To export a file, click Edit > Export to File.
ATTENTION
This function is available only for Global Variables.
Preview
Preview option is used to view the preview of the screen to be printed.
Perform the following steps to see the print preview.
Step
Action
Click Project > Preview on the window for which you want to preview.
A preview of the screen to be printed displays.
TIP
R200
January 2011
The size of the columns can be changed to improve readability.
In View Address, all areas of the specified variable type displays on

the Direct Variable Comment window.
In Global Variable, incomplete variables displayed on the current

window are also displayed on the Preview window.

Honeywell
95
5. Variables
Print
Print option is used to print the screen displayed on Global Variable, Direct Variable
Comment, and Flag windows.
Perform the following steps to print the data.
Step
Action
Click Project > Print from the window to print.
The screen is printed at the configured printer.
TIP
By changing the size of the column, the details to be printed on paper

can be adjusted.
In Global Variable, incomplete variables displayed on the current

screen are also printed.
Other functions
Sort
Double-click the column header to sort the column data in the descending/
ascending sequence.
Current order of data is indicated by the direction of the arrow.

ATTENTION
It is available only in Global Variable and Flag.
If the Flag mode changes to Global Variable, variables is aligned to

display.
View
96
Screen Zoom-In: Displays a magnified view of the screen. Click View > ZoomIn.
Screen Zoom-Out: Displays a shrunk/reduced view of the screen. Click View >
Zoom-Out.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
5. Variables
5.4. Local variable
Use Combo Box for screen Zoom-In/Zoom-Out. Select the magnification rate in
combo box of the toolbar.
5.4
Width Automatic Adjust: Adjusts the column size applicably to the String
length of the cell. Click View > Resize Width.
Height Automatic Adjust: Adjusts the line height applicably to the String height
of the cell. Click View > Resize Height.
Local variable
Local variable declares the variables used in a program or displays the list of declared
variables.
Local variable registration

Local variables are automatically registered when all the attributes are filled.
Editing a local variable
On the list of the currently declared local variables, variable kind, variable name, type,
memory address, initial value, retain, used or not used, and comment can be edited. In
addition, it adds the local variables used in the program to the list of local variables.
A variable can be added, modified, or deleted to/from the list of local variables.
a)
R200
January 2011
Variable kind: VAR, VAR_CONSTANT, and VAR_EXTERNAL,

VAR_EXTERNAL_CONSTANT are available.
Honeywell
97
5. Variables
5.4. Local variable
b)
c)
98
If variable type is CONSTANT, it sets the initial value as the default (0).
If the variable type is VAR_EXTERNAL or
VAR_EXTERNAL_CONSTANT, the columns of the initial value and
retain value are displayed as defaults.
Variable name: The declared variable cannot be duplicated within the Local
variable.
The first character cannot be a number.
Special characters are not allowed with the exception of _.
Space is not allowed as a character.
The name cannot be identical to the name of a direct variable (that is,
MB4, W4, RW9)
If a line is empty, BOOL is displayed as the default type when entering a

variable.
Type: 23 types are available; 20 basic types and 3 derived types.
Basic types(20):
BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, LWORD, SINT, INT, DINT, LINT,

USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME, DATE,
TIME_OF_DAY, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING
Derived
types(3):
ARRAY (that is, ARRAY[0..6,0..2,0..4] OF BOOL) => factor limit

(up to third), STRUCT(that is, STRUCT name display) =>
STRUCT type is no available in STRCT, FB_INST(that is, FB
name display)
d)
Memory address: enter it by using direct variable (I, Q, M, R, and W).
e)
Initial value: default value can be set.
f)
Retain: if memory allocation is set, retain column is inactive.

R, W:
Always retain area.
M:
Check it by obtaining basic parameter information.
I, Q:
Always not retain area.
g)
Used: display whether to use a declared variable.
h)
Comment: all characters are available.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
5. Variables
5.4. Local variable
Multi-line entry is available by using Ctrl + Enter key.
i)
Line validity: To register on global variable window, it needs variable

kind/variable name and type.
A local variable not registered as a global variable, is highlighted in pink.
ATTENTION
An error that occurs when editing a cell is highlighted in pink.
Press ESC key to recover the previous value during the cell edit.
Add EXTERNAL variable

The list created by the Global Variable can be loaded using the Add External Variable
function.
To add external variables:
Click Edit > Add EXTERNAL Variable. The ADD External Variable window
displays.
Export to file
An Export variable to file is used to save the previously declared list of global variables
on the file and to open and read in the external programs.
To export a file:
Click Edit > Export Variables to File.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
99
5. Variables
5.5. Function block variable
5.5
Function block variable

Function block (FB) variables are a part of user-defined function blocks. FB variable
stores operation results in a command such as timer and counter. You can go to userdefined function blocks in the project tree to add a function block.
FB variable
You can either declare the variable or view the list of declared FB variables.
FB variable edit
You can edit the variable kind, variable name, type, trigger, memory address, initial
value, retain, used or not used, and comment of the already declared FB variables in the
list. In addition, a new FB variable can be added to the list of the FB variables.
FB variable registration
FB variables, like the global variables and local variables must be registered before they
are used in a program.
A variable can be added to the list of FB variables, modified or deleted from it.
a)
Variable kind: VAR, VAR_CONSTANT, VAR_INPUT, VAR_OUTPUT,

VAR_IN_OUT, VAR_EXTERNAL, and VAR_EXTERNAL_CONSTANT
are available.
100
If a variable type is CONSTANT, the initial value is set as the default.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
5. Variables
VAR_INPUT, VAR_OUTPUT, and VAR_IN_OUT cannot set the

initial value.
b)
c)
Variable name: The declared variable cannot be duplicated with the identical
name.
Special characters are not available, with the exception of _.
Space is not available as a character.
A direct variable with the same name is not available (that is, MB4, W4,
RW9)

variable.
Basic type(20):
BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, LWORD, SINT, INT, DINT, LINT,

USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME, DATE,
TIME_OF_DAY, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING
Derived type(3):
ARRAY(that is, ARRAY[0..6,0..2,0..4] OF BOOL) => factor limit

(up to third), STRUCT(that is, STRUCT name display) =>
STRUCT type is not available in STRUCT(that is FB name
display)
d)
Trigger: it is VAR_INPUT or VAR_IN_OUT and active only in BOOL type;

it can set R and F status.
e)
Memory address: it cannot be declared as Read Only.
f)
Initial Value: it can be set.
g)
Retain: it cannot be declared as Read Only.
h)
Used: it cannot be declared as Read Only.
i)
Comment: every character is available.
R200
January 2011
Initial value cannot be set if the variable type is VAR_INPUT,

VAR_OUTPUT or VAR_IN_OUT.

Honeywell
101
5. Variables
j)
Line validity: To register on global variable window, it needs variable type,

variable and type.
An FB variable not registered as a global variable is displayed in pink.
ATTENTION
102
An error that occurs when editing a cell is displayed in pink.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
5. Variables
5.6. FUNCTION variable
5.6
FUNCTION variable
Function (FUN) variables are a part of user-defined functions. FUN Variables do not
store the operation results. You can go to user-defined function blocks in the project tree
to add a function.
FUN variable
FUN variable either declares the variable or displays the list of declared FUN variables.
FUN variable edit
On the list of the currently declared FUN variables, variable kind, variable name, type,
trigger, memory address, initial value, retain, used and comment items can be edited. In
addition, a new FUN variable can be added to the list of the FUN variables.
FUN variable registration
The FUN variables must be registered before they are used in a program.
A variable can be added to the list of FUN variables, modified or deleted from it.
a)
Variable Kind: VAR, VAR_INPUT, VAR_OUTPUT, VAR_IN_OUT, and

VAR_RETURN are available.
b)
Variable name: The declared variable cannot be duplicated with the identical
name.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
103
5. Variables
5.6. FUNCTION variable
c)
Special characters with the exception of _ are not available.
The name of the FUN variable must not be same as that of a direct
variable.

variable.
Basic types(20):
BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, LWORD, SINT, INT, DINT,

LINT, USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME,
DATE, TIME_OF_DAY, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING
Derived types(2):
ARRAY(that is ARRAY[0..6,0..2,0..4] OF BOOL) => factor limit

(up to third), STRUCT(that is STRUCT name display) =>
STRUCT type is no available in STRCT
d)
Used: it cannot be declared as Read Only.
e)
Comment: every character is available.

f)
Line validity: To register on FB variable window, it needs variable type,

variable and type.
g)
- If not registered on FB variable, it displays in pink.

TIP
104
If any error occurs when editing a cell, it is displayed in pink.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
5. Variables
5.7. Editing variables
5.7
Editing variables
You can edit the variable, type, memory allocation, initial value, retain, and comment
from the list of the already declared data types. In addition, it adds the data type used in
the program to the list of data types.
Variable registration
A variable must be registered before it is used in a program.
A variable can be added to, modified, or deleted from the list of variables.
a)
Variable Name: The declared variable cannot be duplicated with the identical
name.
Special characters with the exception of _ are not available.
A name same with direct variable cannot be used as a name.
b)
R200
January 2011

variable.
Type: 21 types are available; 20 basic types and 1 derived types

Honeywell
105
5. Variables
5.7. Editing variables
Basic types (20):
BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, LWORD, SINT, INT, DINT,

LINT, USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME,
DATE, TIME_OF_DAY, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING
Derived types(1):
ARRAY(that is, ARRAY[0..6,0..2,0..4] OF BOOL) => factor limit

(up to third)
c)
Memory address: Read Only.
d)
Initial Value: Read Only.
e)
Retain: Read Only.
f)
Comment: Every character is available.

TIP
106
If any error occurs when editing a cell, it is displayed in pink.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
5. Variables
5.8. User-defined function/function block
5.8
User-defined function/function block

A user can personally create and use a function/function block, which is not provided by
SoftMaster. The user-defined function/function block can be created as follows.
Create the user-defined function/function block program
Create the user-defined function/function block I/O variable
User-defined function/function block programming
Compile(register) the user-defined function/function block
Use it in a scan program
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
107
5. Variables
Creating user-defined function/function block program

In order to create a user-defined function/function block, select Project > Add Item
Function or Project > Add Item > Function Block.
108
a)
Program Name: You can enter a user-defined function/function block. When

the user-defined function/function is registered, the input name is registered.
b)
Language: You can select a programming language for the user-defined

function/function block. A user-defined function is created only by the LD
language while a user-defined function block can be created by either the LD
or SFC language.
c)
Use EN/ENO: You can select whether to use or not use EN/ENO, which is
used under the operation condition of function/function block. If you do not
select EN/ENO, a user should declare BOOL type variable in the first input
and first output parameters of the function/function block.
d)
Return Data Type: Designates the type of the results after a user-defined
function is executed. It is activated only when a user-defined function is
created.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
5. Variables
e)
Program description: Used to enter the comment of a user-defined

function/function block. If unnecessary, the comment does not have to be
entered.
f)
OK: Saves the entry in the dialog box and closes the dialog box.
g)
Cancel: Cancels the entry in the dialog box and closes the dialog box.
ATTENTION
Click OK creates a new item with the name entered in the item of userdefined function/function block.
Creating user-defined function/function block I/O variable

Perform the following steps to create user-defined function/function Block I/O variable.
Step
Action
If you double-click a local variable among the items created with the name of
user-defined function/function block, the following local variable window is
created.
Add input variable, I/O variable, and output value in the local variable window.
Depending on the added I/O variables, the function/function block type is
automatically changed in the lower-half of the local variable window.
a)
R200
January 2011
VAR_RETURN: A type of variable recurrenting the value of user-defined

function. It is automatically created as a variable with the same name of the
Honeywell
109
5. Variables
user-defined function with return type designated when creating a user-defined

function.
b)
Function type: used to automatically display input variable, I/O variable,

function/function block type by output variable in the local variable window.
The type is as same as when using the user-defined function/function block in
the scan program.
ATTENTION
There should be at least one or more input and output variables with
a maximum limit of 32.
User-defined function/function block programming

Perform the following steps for user-defined function/function block programming.
Step
Action
If you double-click a program among the items created with the newly entered
name in the user-defined function/function block, a program window with the
previously designated language appears. The following window shows the
screen created when selecting the LD.
Create a program, based on the variable input in the local variable window.
ATTENTION
If local variable edit and program edit are finished, select function/function
block toolbar instruction to check whether the edited user-defined
function/function block is registered.
110

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
5. Variables
Using user-defined function/function blocks

Perform the following steps to use user-defined Function/Function Block.
Step
Action
Open the program to use a user-defined Function/Function Block and to

move the cursor to the position to input.
Click Function/Function Block Toolbar.
Select a user-defined Function/Function Block in the Function/Function

Block dialog box.
Enter the variable to be used in the input/output of function/function block.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
111
5. Variables
Step
112
Action

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.1
Overview
LD program displays the PLC program through graphic signals of coils or contact points
used in the relay logic diagram.
6.2
Limits
There are functional limits in LD Program Edit as described in the following table.
Item
Description
Maximum contact points
Maximum contact points

available to add in a line
Up to 31
Maximum lines
Maximum lines available

to edit
Up to 65535
Maximum copy lines
Maximum copy lines

available to copy at a time
Up to 300
Maximum paste lines
Maximum paste lines to

paste at a time
Up to 300
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
Limit
113
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit
6.3
Program edit
Edit tools
The input of LD edit items are enabled after you select the input symbols from the LD
tool box and if you click on the specific position or if you press applicable shortcut key.
Symbol
114
Shortcut key
Description
Esc
Changes to selection
mode
F3
Normally open contact

point
F4
Normally closed contact

point
Shift + F1
Positive transition pulse

contact point
Shift + F2
Negative transition pulse

contact point
F5
Horizontal line
F6
Vertical line
Shift + F8
Connection line
Shift + F9
Reverse input
F9
Coil
F11
Reverse coil
Shift + F3
Set(latch) coil
Shift + F4
Reset(unlatch) coil

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit
Symbol
Shortcut key
Description
Shift + F5
Positive transition sensing

coil
Shift + F6
Negative transition
sensing coil
F10
Function/function block
Shift + F7
Extended function
Ctrl+3
Normally open OR
contact point
Ctrl+4
Normally closed OR
contact point
Ctrl+5
Positive-conversion
detection OR contact
point
Ctrl+6
Negative-conversion
detection OR contact
point
The following are the shortcut keys related to the movement of the cursor. Applicable
shortcut keys can be customized by users of SoftMaster.
Shortcut Key
Description
Home
Moves to the beginning of the column.
Ctrl+Home
Moves to the beginning of the program.
Back space
Deletes the current data and moves to the left.
Moves the current cursor to the right by a blank.
Moves the current cursor to the left by a blank.
Moves the current cursor upward by a blank.
Moves the current cursor downward by a blank.
End
Moves to the end of the column/row.
Ctrl + End
Moves to the last line edited.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
115
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit
TIP
Among shortcut keys in edit toolbox, s stands for Shift key, c for Ctrl
key. For example, Positive transition pulse contact point: Shift + F1 s
+ F1 sF1.
The shortcut keys described in edit tool are based on the shortcut keys
basically provided in SoftMaster.
For setting details on the user-defined shortcut keys, Refer to Shortcut

keys.
Input contact point

This is used for adding contact points (normally open contact, normally closed contact,
positive transition pulse contact, and negative transition pulse contact).
Perform the following steps to add a contact point:
Step
116
Action
Move the cursor to the location to insert the contact point.
On the tool box, select the type of the contact to insert and click the edit area
or click shortcut key applicable to the contact to insert.
After the address name is inserted in the Variable Input dialog box, click OK.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit
TIP
Click Tool > Options. Select Common Editor under options. If the input
mode is promptly released from the edit page, the Variable Input dialog box is
not automatically displayed when inserting a contact point and coil.
The basic operation of Enter key is to enter identical instructions used in

previous edit.
For example, if a normally open contact is entered in the previous edit, the
normally open contact input dialog box displays when the enter key is
pressed again.
Input OR contact point

Input OR contact points are normally open OR contact point, normally closed OR contact
point, positive-conversion detection OR contact point, negative-conversion detection OR
contact point.
To add an OR contact point, perform the following steps.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location to insert the OR contact point.
On the tool box, select the type of the contact to insert and click the edit area
or click the shortcut key applicable to the OR contact point to insert.
After the address name is inserted in the Variable Input dialog box, click OK.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
117
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit
Step
Action
ATTENTION
In duplicated mode, in case contact point is in cursor, OR

connection does not operate.
In application instruction, vertical line is not inserted.
Entering variable/address
It is used to enter the Address or Variable/Comment.
118

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit
Field Label
Description
Variable Name
It is the variable or declared variable name. If the input string is

of variable format and the applicable string is not registered as a
variable in the Variable/Comment, the Variable/Comment Add
dialog box displays.
Local variable
Displays the list of declared local variables.
Address Comment
Displays the address.
Flag
Displays the list of flags. Detailed flag type can be selected on

the flag item.
List
Displays the list of flags for selection. You can select among
System/High-speed link/P2P/PID Flags.
All
Select this option to display all the flags for the item. Clear this
option to display the flags applicable to the input parameter
number/block index.
Parameter number
Enter and set the number for each selected flag item. 0~12 is
available for HS link, 0~8 for P2P, and 0~63 for PID.
Block Index
Enter the block number for each selected flag item. 0~127 is
available for High-speed link and 0~63 for P2P.
Global variable
Click to display the list of global variables. It can be registered

as an EXTERNAL variable.
New Variable
Click to add a variable to the list of local variables.
Edit Variable
Click to edit a selected variable.
Delete Variable
Click to delete a selected variable from the list of local variables.
OK
Click to save changes and close the dialog box.
Cancel
Click to close the dialog box.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
119
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit
Add/edit variable name

It is used to Add or edit a variable.
Field Label
Description
Variable Name
Enter the name of the variable to be added.
Data Type
Select a data type for the variable.
Variable Kind
Select a variable type.
Address
Allocate a direct address for the variable.
Initial value
Enter the initial value for the variable.
Trigger
Select the trigger state for the variable.
Retain
Select to retain the current state of the variable.
Description
Enter a description for the variable.
TIP
If the variable name is entered on the Variable/Address dialog box, it is
automatically completed based on the currently displayed Variable/Comment
list.
120

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit
Inserting lines
Insert a horizontal line for horizontal connection between LD edit factors, and a vertical
line for vertical connections.
Inserting a horizontal line
Perform the following steps to insert a horizontal line.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location to connect.
Select the shortcut key of Horizontal Line Input or select Horizontal Line on
the tool box and select the edit area to insert the Horizontal Line.
Inserting a vertical line

Perform the following steps to add a vertical line.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location to connect.
Select the shortcut key of Vertical Line Input or select Vertical Line on the tool
box and select the edit area to insert the Vertical Line.
TIP
The vertical line is inserted to the left of the current location of the cursor.
Inserting coil
It is used to insert coils, that is, coil, reverse coil, positive transition pulse coil, and
negative transition pulse coil.
Perform the following steps to insert reverse coil/positive transition pulse coil/negative
transition pulse coil.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
121
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location where the coil is to be inserted.
On the tool box, select the type of coil to insert and then click the edit area or
click the shortcut key applicable to the coil to insert it.
After a variable name is entered on the Variable Selection dialog box, click
OK.
TIP
If a coil and output related application instruction is entered, a horizontal

line is automatically inserted to connect with the left item.
In case there is a duplicate coil, output to output module, according to

the status of last coil.
Inserting a function block

It is used to enter a function (block) for operation.
Perform the following steps to enter a function (block).
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location where the function (block) is to be entered.
On the tool box, select the function (block) to enter and then click the edit
area or click the shortcut key applicable to the function (block) input.
Select a function/function block.
122

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit
Step
3
R200
January 2011
Action
a)
Name: Select the function (block) to use.
b)
Search: Used to search for the name of a function(block)
c)
List: Select function, function block or function/function block to

display the appropriate information.
d)
Category: Select a category for the function (block).
e)
Function list: Displays the list of function (block) of a selected category.
f)
Function information: Displays the information and properties of a

function. In case of function, a user can set the properties of an input
parameter; in case of function block, a user can select the name and
class of an instance.
g)
OK: Click to apply the details and close the dialog box.
h)
Cancel: Click to close the dialog box.
On the Function (block) Input dialog box, enter the function (block), and then
Honeywell
123
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit
Step
Action
click OK.
For additional information on the function (block), refer to the 2MLI CPU
Users Guide.
Favorite function block

It displays a function block that is mostly used in the current project or recently used.
You can also register a function to frequently use in the future.
Viewing function block
Perform the following steps to display a function block:
Step
Action
Click View > Instruction Window.
Viewing Function block.

A function block is automatically registered when it is used in a LD program.
The function block is listed on the beginning of the list. If a function is already
added to the list, the item (function) displays in the beginning.
124

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit
Step
Action
If the current list selection is Most Recently Used, the function is determined
by the frequency of function block used.
TIP
A function block is automatically registered if the function block is

selected on the function block dialog box.
A function copied or pasted does not affect the frequency and the
recent use.
Viewing favorite function

It enables you to register a function block for frequent use in projects.
Perform the following steps to register a function block.
Step
Action
Select a Favorite Function in the selection box.
Click Edit to view the list of Functions. The Favorite Function Setting
window displays.
The field description for Favorite Function Setting window are as
follows:
Favorite Function: Displays the currently selected function. The content
displayed on the Favorite Function List is the content to be displayed in the
Command window.
Function List: Displays the list of function blocks available for the current
project.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
125
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit
Step
Action
Add: Select a function and click Add to add the selected function to the
Favorite Function list.
Remove: Click to delete a selected function from the Favorite Function.
Up: Click to move a selected item to a higher level of the favorite function.
Down: Click to move a selected item to a lower level of the favorite function.
Clear All: Click to clear the current favorite function list.
OK: Click to check and save changes. It also closes the dialog box.
Use function
It is used to use the function block on the list.
Perform the following steps to use the function block.
Step
126
Action
Move the cursor to the position to insert a function.
Double-click a command to insert in the Command Window.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit
Step
Action
TIP
It is also possible to drag an item to insert in the Command Window and
insert it to the LD program.
Entering comments
It is used to insert the Rung and Output Comment. The comment displayed at the start of
Rung is called Rung Comment, and the comment for the output factor is called Output
Comment.
Adding rung comment

Perform the following steps to enter a rung comment:
Step
1
R200
January 2011
Action
Move the cursor to the location to enter the rung comment.

Honeywell
127
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit
Step
2
Action
Click Edit > Comment/Label Input.
Enter the Comment and Label.
a)
Comment: Selected to enter the Rung Comment.
b)
Label: Selected to enter the label.
c)
OK: Click to apply the selected details and to close the dialog box.
d)
If the Rung Comment dialog box displays, enter the comment and click OK.
Enter or edit the Rung Comment or the Output Comment.
128
a)
Comment: Enter the details of the rung comment or the output

comment.
b)
OK: Click to apply the input details and to close the dialog box.
c)

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit
Output comment
Perform the following steps to enter the output comment.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location to enter the output comment.
Double-click or press Enter key.
Enter the output comment on the Output Comment dialog box and click OK.
TIP
You can enter an output comment only when an output is available.
Input label
It is used to enter the label to refer to from the extended function of JMP.
Perform the following steps to enter a label on a function.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location to enter the label.
Click Edit > Insert Comment/Label. The Comment/Label dialog box

displays.
Select Label and press Enter or click OK. The Label List window displays.
In the Label List window, enter the label to add and click OK.
The field description for Label List window are as follows:
R200
January 2011
a)
Label: Enter the name of the label.
b)
Label in: Displays the label currently in use in the same scan program.
Selecting an item on the Label in use, the selected item is entered.

Honeywell
129
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit
TIP
A maximum of 16 English characters can be used for the label name.
The first character of the label cannot be an integer or a special

character.
Label Input rules are similar to the Variable/Comment Input rules.
Insert extension function

It is used to insert the extension function such as insert/call subroutine and program end.
Perform the following steps to insert an extension function.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the position to insert an extension function.
Click Edit > Tools > Extension Function. The Extension Function window
displays.
Select an extension function to insert and click OK.

The field description for Label List window are as follows:
a)
Extension: Shows an extended function or displays the inserted

extended function.
b)
Command List: Displays the available extended function.
c)
OK: Click to apply a selected item and to close the dialog box.
d)
TIP
Extension functions, SBRT, and RET cannot be inserted at LD used in SFC
Action and Transition.
130

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit
Insert cell
It is used to insert a new cell at the current cursor position.
Perform the following steps to insert a new cell.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location to insert the cell.
Click Edit > Insert Cell.
TIP
If inserting a cell in Function Block, a variable is also moved together.
Insert line
It is used to insert a new line at the current cursor position.
Perform the following steps to insert a line.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location to insert the line in.
Click Edit > Insert Line.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
131
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit
Step
Action
TIP
a) If you Insert Line, a new line is inserted in the current cursor position.
b) If you select an area for Line Insert, new lines equal to the lines in the
selected area are inserted.
c) If the function block is contained, the line cannot be inserted.
Delete item
It is used to delete the input contact point, coil, function block, line, rung/output
comment, and label.
Perform the following steps to delete an item.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location to delete the item.
Delete cell
It is used to delete factors such as the input contact point and horizontal line to draw in
the next cell.
Perform the following steps to delete cell (input contact point and horizontal line).
Step
132
Action
Move the cursor to the location to delete the cell from.
Click Edit > Delete Cell.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit
Step
Action
TIP
Position the cursor on the cell to be deleted and press Delete on the
keyboard. Alternately, right-click and select Delete from the context menu.
Delete line
It is used to delete all the cells in the selected row.
Perform the following steps to delete a line.
Step
Action
Move the cursor onto the line to delete.
Click Edit > Delete Line.
Copy/cut/paste
It is used to copy data from a selected area, or cut the data to copy at a specific position.
Unlike Copy, the Cut function deletes the data from the selected area.
Copy and paste
Perform the following steps to copy the data to windows clipboard.
Step
Action
Select the area to copy.
Click Edit > Copy.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
133
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the area to paste.
Click Edit > Paste.
Cut and paste

Perform the following steps to cut and paste selected data.
Step
Action
Select the area to cut.
Click Edit > Cut.
Move the cursor to the area to paste on.
Click Edit > Paste.
Undo and redo

It is used to Undo the details edited by Program Edit back to its previous state, or execute
the cancelled action again.
134

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit
Undo (Example of delete)

Perform the following steps to undo a particular action.
Step
Action
Move the cursor onto the position to delete.
On the menu, select Edit > Undo.
Redo (Example of delete)

To redo a particular action:
Click Edit > Redo.
TIP
All the edited details can be cancelled or executed again.
The number of times to cancel the execution is unlimited.
Program edit mode

LD Program supports two modes; Insert Mode and Overwrite mode. It is applied when
inserting a contact point or function (block).
Insert mode:
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
135
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit
Overwrite mode:
TIP
Use Insert key on the keyboard to toggle between Overwrite and Insert.
If inserting a contact point

Overwrite mode: If entering a different type of contact point, the only contact point type
is changed with the input address or variable remained (it does not work if a same type
contact point is selected).
Insert mode: Always inserts a new contact point to a designated position, regardless of
contact point type. Insertion operation is as same as Insert Cell.
If inserting a function (block)

Overwrite mode: Inserts a function (block) into the current position.
Insert mode: It inserts a space as high as a function (block) if there is no enough space to
insert the function. Insert Space is as same as Insert Line.
136

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
6. LD Edit
6.3. Program edit
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
137
6. LD Edit
6.4. Viewing program options
6.4
Viewing program options
View IL program
It is used to convert the LD program to the IL program and displays with the IL program.
Perform the following steps to view an IL program.
Step
Action
Select a program.
Select View > IL.
ATTENTION
In case of an incomplete rung in the program, the LD program cannot be

converted to an IL program.
Edit is not possible in IL View.
Program magnification change

This is used for changing the magnification of the LD program displayed on the screen.
138

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
6. LD Edit
Zoom-in
To Zoom-in, click View > Zoom-In.
Zoom-out
To Zoom-out, click View > Zoom-Out.
TIP
Hold the CTRL key on your keyboard and spin the mouse wheel
forward to zoom-in.
backward to zoom-out.
On the View Tool selection box, the user can select or directly enter
the magnification.
For additional information on Tool bars, refer to Tool bar.
View address
It is used for displaying only the name of the address for the variable or address used as
the contact point, coil, and function (block). If there is no address, it displays a name of
variable.
To view an address:
Select View > Addresses.
View variables
It is used for displaying the name of the variable for the variable or address used as the
contact point, coil, and function (block).
If no variable is declared for the address, it is displayed as the address name.
To view variables:
Select View > Variables.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
139
6. LD Edit
View address/variables
It is used for displaying the name of the address/variable for the variable or address used
in the contact point, coil, and function (block).
If there is no address in the variable, the variable name is displayed.
To view address/variable:
Select View > Address/Variables.
View address/comment
It is used for displaying the address/comment for the variable or address used in the
contact point, coil, and function (block).
If there is no address in the variable, the variable name is displayed.
To view an address/comment:
Select View > Address/Comments.

TIP
If View Options are changed, it may take some time according to the
amount of the edited program steps.
Print function of the Address/Variable/Comment is available. For the

details of print option, refer LD program print.
View variables/comments
It is used for displaying the variable/comment for the device used as the operand of the
contact point, coil, and application instruction.
To view a variable/comment:
Select View > Variables/Comments.

ATTENTION
140
If View Options are changed, it may take some time according to the
number of the edited program steps.
Print function of the Device/Variable/Comment is available.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
6. LD Edit
Adjust number of contact point

It is used to adjust the number of contact points displayed on the screen. Here, the
number of contact points is the total number (horizontal cell - 1), excluding the output
position.
To adjust the number of contact point:
Click View > Change Columns > Increase Columns.
If the data on the right of the current screen is larger than the number of contact points to
display, it may be displayed by rung including arrow.
TIP
R200
January 2011
It may increase or decrease one by one in View > Toolbox.
The number of contact to set is 9 ~ 32.
The number of contact points minimally set in LD program used for

SFC action and transition is 5.

Honeywell
141
6. LD Edit
6.5. Additional edit function
LD view properties
It is used to select the viewing options of the LD window. In the window, the options of
address, variable and comment view can be set while magnification and the number of
contact points can be set simultaneously.
Perform the following steps to view LD screen properties.
Step
Action
Click View > LD Properties. The LD View Properties window displays.
Change the required LD properties and click OK.

The field description for LD View Properties window are as follows:
Field Label
142
Description
View Option
Indicates the view options for variable and

address.
Magnification
Indicates the magnification on the window. It

is allowed from 40 to 200%.
No. of contacts
Indicates the number of contact points

displayed on the window.
OK
Click to apply the settings and to close the

dialog box.
Cancel
Apply
Click to apply the settings to the current LD

window.
Default
Click to set the current settings as the default

of LD window. If creating a new LD program,
it is displayed in the currently set view mode.
Reset
Click to restore the current settings to the

default.
All Windows
Click to apply current settings to all windows.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
6. LD Edit
TIP
6.5
In the LD Properties window, Address + Variable + Comment View

Options cannot be set.
In case of All Windows, the setting is applied to all of SFC program

action, transition and users function (block) created by LD.
Additional edit function

Additional functions for convenient edit are described as follows.
Optimize program
It is used for deleting the horizontal and empty lines between the contact points, to
optimize the position where LD diagram is drawn.
Perform the following steps to optimize the program.
Click Edit > Optimize Program
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
143
6. LD Edit
ATTENTION
Optimize program if once executed cannot be reverted to its previous

state through execution cancel.
It may take some time according to the size of the program.
In case LD logic is not complete, optimization function does not operate.
Block mask instruction

This is used to specify or cancel the area block mask in the PLC among the LD
programs.
Block mask instruction setting
Perform the following steps to edit the block mask instruction settings.
Step
144
Action
Move the cursor to the rung to specify the block mask.
Click Edit > Set Block Mask.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
6. LD Edit
Canceling block mask instruction

Perform the following steps to remove the block mask instruction.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the rung to cancel the Block Mask instruction.
Click Edit > Remove Block Mask.
Bookmark
It enables the user to easily move to a specific area with the bookmark specified on the
line.
Set bookmark
Perform the following steps to set a bookmark.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to a line to specify the bookmark on.
Click Edit > Bookmark > Set/Remove.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
145
6. LD Edit
Step
Action
Reset bookmark
Perform the following steps to reset a bookmark.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the line to cancel the bookmark from.
Click Edit > Bookmark > Set/Reset.
Reset all bookmarks

To reset all bookmarks, click Edit > Bookmark > Remove All.
146

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
6. LD Edit
Previous bookmark
To edit the previous bookmark, click Edit > Bookmark > Previous Bookmark.
Next bookmark
To edit the next bookmark, click Edit > Bookmark > Next Bookmark.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
147
6. LD Edit
TIP
Bookmark is specified on the line unit.
Bookmark is not an item to edit, thus the Set/Reset options are not
included in Undo and Redo.
Go to
Finding specific line
It is used to move to the specified line position, or go to the position of the edited label
and rung comment.
Perform the following steps to find a specific line in the program:
Step
Action
Click Find/Replace > Go To > Step/Line. The Go To Line window displays.

The field description for Go To Line window are as follows:
Field Label
148
Description
Go to line
Specifies the line to go to.
Program list
Displays the list of the current PLC programs.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
6. LD Edit
Step
Action
Go to
Click to close the window and to go to the

selected programs line/step.
Cancel
Click to close the window.
Select the line to go to and the program from the list. Click Go to for moving
the specified line/step.
TIP
Go To Line is available only in the LD program.
This function is not available for the LD used for SFC

Action/Transitions.
Finding specific label

Perform the following steps to find a specific label.
Step
1
Action
Click Find/Replace > Go To > Label. The Go To Label window displays.
The field description for Go To Label window are as follows:
Field Label
R200
January 2011
Description
Program
Displays the list of the current PLC programs. If you

select All Programs, the list of all the labels
displays.
Labels list
Displays the list of the labels used in the selected

program.
Go To
Click to close the window and to go to the selected

label.
Cancel
Select the label and program from the list. Click Go to to move to the
specified label.

Honeywell
149
6. LD Edit
TIP
Go To Label is available only in the LD Program.
This function is not available for the LD used for SFC

Action/Transition.
Finding specific rung comment

Perform the following steps to find a specific comment in a program.
Step
Action
Click Find/Replace > Go To > Rung Comment. The Go to ring comment

window displays.
The field description for Go to ring comment window are as follows:
Field Label
Description
Program
Displays the list of the current PLC

programs. If you select All
Programs, the list of all the rung
comments displays.
Rung comment list
Displays the list of the rung

comments used in the selected
program.
Go to
Click this to go to the selected rung

comment.
Cancel
Select the program and the rung comment to go to from the list. Click Go to
to move to the specified rung comment.
TIP
Go To Rung Comment is available only in the LD Program.
The LD used for SFC Action/Transition is not available in Go To.
Finding END command

Perform the following steps to go to the END command.
150

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
6. LD Edit
Step
Action
Click Find/Replace > Go To > END Command. The Go To END Instruction

window displays.
The field description for Go To END Instruction window are as follows:
Field Label
Description
Program
Displays the list of the current PLC

programs. If you select All Programs, the
list of all the END instructions is displays.
END instruction list
Displays the list of the END instructions

used in the selected program.
Go to
Click to close the window to go to the

selected END instruction.
Close
Select the program and the END command to go to from the list. Click Go to
to move to the specified END command.
TIP
R200
January 2011
Go To END Instruction is available only in the LD Program.
The LD used for SFC Action/Transition is not available in Go To.

Honeywell
151
6. LD Edit
152

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.1
Overview
SFC is used for controlling the execution sequence of other programs (LD, ST) by using
graphic symbols (step, transition, and branch).
7.2
SFC program limitations

SFC program has the following limitations when editing a program.
Item
Description
Limit
Maximum step
number
Indicates the maximum number of available

steps excluding the step used as step
variable in the program.
512 steps
Maximum row
number
Maximum number of editable rows.
65,535 rows
Maximum
column number
Maximum number of editable columns.
65,535 columns
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
153
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit
7.3
Program edit
Edit tools
To begin entering the inputs of SFC Edit items, select the input symbols from the LD tool
box and click on a specific location or press the associated shortcut key.
Symbol
Shortcut Key
Description
Esc
Changes to selection mode.
Step+Transiton or Transition+Step
Action
Block+Transition or Transition+Block
Label
Jump
Left Branch
Right Branch
The following shortcut keys are related with the movement of the cursor. Applicable
Shortcut Keys can be specified by users in the SoftMaster.
Shortcut Key
154
Description
Home
Moves to the start of the column.
Ctrl + Home
Moves to the start of the program
Deletes the current data and moves to the left.
Moves the current cursor to the right by a blank.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit
Shortcut Key
Description
Moves the current cursor to the left by a blank.
Moves the current cursor upward by a blank.
End
Moves the current cursor downward by a blank.
Ctrl + End
Moves to the end of the column.
ATTENTION
Among shortcut keys in Edit Toolbox, s stands for Shift key, c for
Ctrl key, a for Alt key.
The shortcut keys described in Edit Tool are based on the shortcut
keys basically provided in SoftMaster. For more details on the userdefined shortcut keys, refer to Configuring shortcut keys.
For each SFC program added to the project program list, atleast 64
words of automatic variables must be declared.
Input step/transition
This is used to insert a Step/Transition in a program.
Perform the following steps to insert a Step/Transition.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location you want edit.
Select symbol on the tool box and click the edit area or press shortcut key
applicable to symbol.
A new Step/Transition is inserted.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
155
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit
Step
Action
ATTENTION
Step name is allocated automatically; however, you can edit it.
According to input location, Step + Transition or Transition + Step are

inserted.
Item of location selected
Step +
Transition
Transition, start line of parallel branch, label, selection

branch termination line.
Transition
+ Step
Step, block, start line of selection branch, parallel

branch termination line.
156
Read Only variables cannot be used for Step/Transition variable.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit
Input action
Action is executed when step is activated. Executes the program connected with action.
Perform the following steps to edit the symbol in a program.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location you want to edit
Select symbol on the tool box and click the edit area or press shortcut key
or
ATTENTION
Actions location is different according to selected edit area.
Location
R200
January 2011
item
Right
Actions location is the right of step when you select a step.
Bottom
Actions location is the bottom of action when you select an

action.
The number of steps connected with one step is not limited.
Action cannot be connected with a block.

Honeywell
157
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit
Input block/transition
Perform the following steps to insert a Block/Transaction.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the block you want edit.
Select a block on the tool box and click the edit area or click the shortcut key
A New block/Transition is inserted.
ATTENTION
Block input location standard is same as step input.
Input label
Perform the following steps to input a label.
Step
158
Action
On the tool box, select the label to enter and then click the edit area or click
the shortcut key applicable to symbol.
The new label is inserted.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit
Step
Action
ATTENTION
Label can be inserted when selecting a step or block.
Label is inserted ahead of the selected step or block.
Input jump
Perform the following steps to insert a jump in a program.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location you want to edit.
On the tool box, select the Jump to insert and then click the edit area or click
the shortcut key applicable to symbol.
A new jump is inserted.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
159
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit
ATTENTION
The jump can be inserted when selecting the last transition within
selection branch or transition of program in the last row.
The jump is inserted ahead of the selected transition.
The jump is available within the same program.
Create left branch

To create a left branch, perform the following steps.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location to start branch.
On the tool box, select the left branch and click the edit area or press
shortcut key.
It displays branch start location and branch connection location.
Branch start location

Branch termination location
160
Move cursor to the branch end location.
Select the branch end location.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit
Step
6
Action
The branch is created.
ATTENTION
When selecting the branch start location, the selection branch or

parallel branch is created according to the branch start location.
Item of branch start
location
Line shape
Selection branch
Step, block
Horizontal one line
Parallel branch
Transition
Horizontal two line
Extending branch
Perform the following steps to extend a branch.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the branch to extend.
On the tool box, select the left branch and click the edit area or press
appropriate shortcut key.
A new branch is created.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
161
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit
Step
Action
ATTENTION
The maximum number of branches is limited to the number of rows.
Create right branch

To create a right branch, perform the following steps.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location to start the branch.
On the tool box, select the right branch and click the edit area or press
shortcut key.
It displays the branch start location and the branch connection location.
Branch start location
Branch termination location
162

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the branch termination location.
Select the branch end location.
The branch is created.
ATTENTION
The procedure to create a parallel branch is same as creating a left

branch. Refer to Create left branch.
Extending branch
Perform the following steps to extend a branch of a location.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location to extend the branch.
On the tool box, select the right branch and click the edit area or press
shortcut key.
New branch is inserted.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
163
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit
Step
Action
Edit step property

You can edit step name, comment, and so on.
Perform the following steps to edit Step property of a location.
Step
Action
Press Enter key or double-click. The Step Properties window displays.

The field description for Step Properties window are as follows:
Field Label
164
Description
Name
Enter the name of the step.
Comment
Enter a comment for the step.
Initial step
Designates it as initial step.
Step variable
Refers to step name from local variable list.
Find
To find a variable from the local variable list.
OK
Click to save the contents and to close the

window.
Cancel
Click to close window without saving.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit
ATTENTION
The initial step is execution start step of the program. You can
designate only one. When checking the program, it checks the error.
When using step variable, you can refer it from other programs.
Transition property
You can edit the transitions name, comment.
Perform the following steps to edit the transition property of a location.
Step
Action
Press Enter key or double-click. The Transition Properties window

displays.
The field description for Transition Properties window are as follows:
Field Label
Description
Name
Enter transitions name.
Comment
Enter the transitions comment.
Type
Select transition as variable or program.
List
Displays the other transition used in the

current program.
Find
You can select variable from local variable

list.
Less
Hides the list.
OK

window.
Cancel
ATTENTION
R200
January 2011
Transition program can be written by LD program.

Honeywell
165
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit
Action property
You can edit the actions name, comment, and qualifier.
Perform the following steps to edit the action property of a location.
Step
Action
Press Enter key or double-click. The Action Properties window displays.

The field description for Action Properties window are as follows:
Field Label
166
Description
Name
Enter the name of the action.
Comment
Enter a comment for the action.
Type
Designates action as variable or program.
Post scan
Deactivates the coil in the action after

executing the action.
List
Displays the other actions used in the current

program.
Qualifier
Acts differently according to action qualifier.
Time
Enters time according to qualifier.
Find
You can select variable from local variable

list.
Less
Hides the list.
OK

window.
Cancel

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit
ATTENTION
Action can operate differently according to the action qualifier.
Qualifier
Functions
N (Nonstored)
Action is executed when step is

activated.
R (overriding
Reset)
When the step is activated, the action

whose qualifier is S, SD, DS, and SL
stops.
S (Set)
If the step is activated, it continues its

execution unit, R qualifier is executed.
L (time
Limited)

execution when the time is being set.
D (time
Delayed)
If the step is activated, the action starts

after setting the time.
P (Pulse)

execution during one scan.
SD (Stored
& time
Delay)
If the step is activated, action starts after

setting time and it continues its execution
unit until R qualifier is executed. If R
qualifier is executed before setting time,
action is not executed.
DS (time
Delayed &
Stored)
If step is activated, action starts after

setting time and it continues its execution
unit until R qualifier is executed. If R
qualifier is executed before setting time
or step is deactivated, action is not
executed.
SL (Stored &
time Limited)
It continues its execution when the time

is being set or unit R qualifier is
executed.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
Action characteristic
activated status step

Action operating
R qualifier is executed
Setting time
1 scan execution
R
R
167
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit
ATTENTION
You can insert a time expression such as T#1h2m3s T#2m

T#15s.
Action program can be written by LD ST or SFC.
Edit block property

You can edit blocks property name, comment, and other details.
Perform the following steps to edit the Block property of a location.
Step
Action
Press Enter key or double-click the block. The Block Properties window
displays.
The field description for Block Properties window are as follows:
Field Label
Description
Name
Enter blocks name.
Comment
Enter the blocks comment.
List
Displays the other block used in the current

program.
Less
Hides the list.
OK

window.
Cancel
ATTENTION
168
Block can be written by only SFC program.
Action cannot be connected with block.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit
Edit label property

You can edit labels name.
Perform the following steps to edit Label property of a block.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the block you want to edit.
Press Enter key or double-click the block. The Label Properties window
displays.
The field description for Label Properties window are as follows:
Field Label
Description
Name
Enter label name.
List
Displays the name of other labels used in the

current program.
OK

window.
Cancel
Jump property
You can edit jumps name.
Perform the following steps to edit Jump property of a program.
Step
Action
Press Enter key or double-click a block.

The field description for Jump Properties window are as follows:
Field Label
R200
January 2011
Description
Name
Enter jump name.
List
Displays the name of other labels used in the current

program.
OK
Click to save the contents and to close the window.

Honeywell
169
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit
Step
Action
Cancel
ATTENTION
Ensure that the name of the Jump is the same as label name.
Jump to other SFC program is not available.
Set branch priority

You can set branch priority.
Perform the following steps to set branch priority.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the select branchs start location.
Click Edit > Set Branch Priority.
Click the select branchs start location in order to set branch priority.
To complete the editing, click outside the selection branch.
ATTENTION
170
You can set selection branch priority equal to the branch number.
When not setting branch priority, compilation is initiated from left to

right. Program is executed from left to right.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit
Erase branch priority

You can erase branch priority.
Perform the following steps to erase branch priority.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the branch that has priority.
Click Edit > Erase Branch Priority.
Branch priority is erased.
Delete item
You can delete a step, transition, action, block, label, jump, and branch of a program.
Perform the following steps to delete an existing item.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location where the item you want to delete exists.
ATTENTION
R200
January 2011
The transition and blocks can be deleted by performing the above

step.
Sometimes deleting is not available. In this case, editing is canceled

automatically after the warning message.
Deleting a branch deletes all items under the branch.

Honeywell
171
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit
Copy/cut/paste
Perform the following steps to copy and paste data.
Step
Action
Select the block/function you want to copy.
Click Edit > Copy.
Copied area displays.
Move the cursor to the location you want to paste.
Click Edit > Paste.
ATTENTION
172
The item under step, transition and block can be copied with step,
transition and block according to selected location.
Sometimes pasting is not available according to the location to paste.

At this time, editing is canceled automatically.
When copying the branch start point, the item under branch is copied
with branch start point.
When pasting the branch, select the branch start point.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit
The selection branch can be pasted into the selection branch and the
parallel branch can be pasted into the parallel branch.
When pasting into the action, select the step you want to paste.
Principal to paste is same with item input.
Cut/paste
Perform the following steps to Cut and Paste data.
Step
Action
Select the location to cut.
Click Edit > Cut.
Move the cursor to the location to paste.
Click Edit > paste.
Undo and redo

SoftMaster provides the standard undo and redo options.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
173
7. SFC Edit
7.3. Program edit
Undo (example)
Perform the following steps to undo an action.
Step
Action
Place the cursor to the location you want to delete.
Click Edit > Undo. Deleting is cancelled.
Redo (example)
Perform the following steps to redo an action.
Click Edit > Redo to redo an action.
ATTENTION
174

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View program
You can Undo and Redo for all items.
Unlimited number of undo is available.
Program edit mode

SFC program supports only insert mode.
Insert mode:
7.4
View program
You can zoom in or zoom out on a program.
Program zoom in/out

Zoom in
To Zoom In:
Click View > Zoom In.
Zoom out
To Zoom Out:
Click View > Zoom Out.

TIP
forward to zoom-in.
backward to zoom-out.
On the View Tool selection box, the user can select or directly enter
the magnification.
SFC property
It enables you to edit SFC property.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
175
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View program
To edit SFC property, perform the following steps:
Click Tools > Options > SFC.
a)
Show comment: Displays the comment of step, transition, action, and block.
b)
Show print area: Displays the printing area with thick dotted line.
c)
Show page number: Displays page number printed in the print area.
d)
Step column width: Sets width of vertical column of step, transition location.
e)
Action column width: Displays width of vertical column of action location.
f)
Utilize SFC split window: You can use SFC split window.
g)
Split window position: You may decide in which direction the window gets
divided.
h)
Split window contents: You may decide which contents the program displays
in the split window.
ATTENTION
176
The range of the Step column is 20~200.
The range of the Action column is 70~400.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View program
Show comment
<Not Showing comment>
<Showing comment>
Show print area
Show page number
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
177
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View program
Step column width
<Step column 68 pixel (basic) screen>
<Step column 100 pixel screen>
Action column width
<Action column100 pixel (basic) screen>
178
<Action column 150 pixel screen>

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View program
Utilize SFC split window
<With split window>
<Without split window>
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
179
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View program
Split window contents
<Viewing the selected action, transition: when selecting action>
<Viewing the identical SFC program>
180

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View program
<Viewing the fix split window contents: displays the previous screen>
Split window position
<Right>
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
181
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View program
<Bottom>
View block/action/transition list
You can check other programs list used in the SFC program and edit the name and
comment.
Perform the following steps to view Block/Action/Transition List.
Step
182
Action
Click View > Block/Action/Transition List.
The list displays.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.4. View program
Open action/transition
In the SFC program, open the selected action, transition with the new window.
Perform the following steps to open Action/Transition.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the location you want to open the program.
Click View > Open Action/Transition.
Open the selected program in a new window.
Address/variables
Displays variables or address used in the contact, coil, function (block) as
Address/Variables name. If variable does not have an address, it displays the variable
name.
To view Address/Variables:
Click View > Address/Variables.
Address/comments
Displays variables or addresses used in the contact, coil, function (block) as
Address/Comment. If the variable does not have an address, it displays the name of the
variable.
To view Address/Comments:
Click View > Address/Comments.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
183
7. SFC Edit
7.5. Edit additional function
ATTENTION
Modifying the settings may result in increased viewing time based on

the program size.
When printing, Address/Variables/Comments is supported. For

additional information, refer Print.
Adjust contact number

It is used to adjust the number of contact points displayed on the window. Here, the
number of contact points is equal to the total number (horizontal cell - 1), excluding the
output position.
To adjust the number of contact points:
Click View > Change columns > Contact no.
If the data to the right of the current window is larger than the number of contact points
to display, it may be displayed by rung including arrow.
ATTENTION
184
It may increase or decrease one by one in View > Toolbox.
The number of contact to set is 9 ~ 31.
The number of contact points minimally set in LD program used for

SFC action and transition is 5.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
7. SFC Edit
7.5
Edit additional function

SoftMaster provides an edit additional function for convenience of edit.
Bookmark setting
It enables the user to easily move to a specific area with the bookmark specified on the
line. For more information, refer to Bookmark.
Go to
You can go to designated line, edited label, and rung comment. For more information,
refer to Go to.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
185
7. SFC Edit
186

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
8. Programming
8.1
Cross reference
It is used to display the application details of all the addresses and variables used in a
program. It includes contact points (normally open contact point, normally closed contact
point, positive transition pulse contact point and negative transition pulse contact point),
coils (coil, reverse coil, positive transition pulse coil and negative transition pulse coil),
I/O parameter of function(block) and all the addresses and variables used as the operand
of extended functions.
View all addresses

It is used to display all the addresses used in the current PLC.
To view all the addresses in a PLC, click View > Cross Reference. The Message
Window displays.
The field description for Message Window are as follows:
Field Label
Description
Address
Displays the names of all the addresses used in the current PLC.
Variable
Name
Displays the names of all variables used in the current PLC.
PLC
Displays names of PLC belonging to the current program.
Program
Displays the name of the program using the applicable address.
Position
Displays the coordinates inside the program.
Comment
Displays the comment of address and variables.

The following signs are displayed for the type of instructions:
-( )-: Coil
-(/)-: Reverse coil
Information
-(S)-: Set coil

-(R)-: Reset coil
-(P)-: Positive transition pulse coil
-(N)-: Negative transition pulse coil
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
187
8. Programming
8.1. Cross reference
Field Label
Description
-| |-: Normally open contact point
-|/|-: Normally closed contact point
-|P|-: Positive transition pulse contact point
-|N|-: Negative transition pulse contact point
-[F]-: Extended function parameter
-VAR-: Function(block) I/O parameter
Data sorting
Click the column header to sort the applicable column. Whenever you click the column,
it is sorted in the ascending and then descending sequence, repeatedly. A triangle is
displayed on the basic column of the current alignment. The normal triangle indicates
that the data is sorted in the ascending sequence, and a reverse triangle indicates that the
data is sorted in the descending sequence.
Example 1: Alignment in the ascending sequence based on the address names.
Example2: Alignment in the descending sequence based on the address names.
Go to
It is used to go to the position of the program using the selected address. Double-click the
applicable line, or right-click to select Go To from the menu.
188

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
8. Programming
8.1. Cross reference
Select row
It is used to display the specific data only on the screen. Right-click and select each item
from the Select Row menu.
Lock data
Details of the Cross Reference Window are updated when the cursor moves in the
program. If you do not want to update them, specify the Fix function. Right-click and
select Lock Data.
Delete data
It deletes all the details of the Cross Reference Window.
Output cross reference instantly
If an address or variable is selected in the program, the used position and the application
are displayed.
Perform the following steps to view the output cross-reference instantly.
Step
1
Action
Select the Cross Reference tab to display the Cross Reference Result.
Move the cursor to the position of the address to display its purpose.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
189
8. Programming
8.2. Used address
ATTENTION
If Output cross reference instantly is used, the edit speed is likely

to slow down.
Select Tools > Options > Edit Ladder/Mnemonic, on the Edit page,
select Output cross reference instantly option.
Check duplicate coil instantly

This function is used to check the applicable address or variable if used as duplicate
whenever the coil is edited. If the address is used as a coil in a different location inside
the PLC, the list for the program name, location and step displays.
Perform the following steps to check a duplicated coil instantly:
Step
Action
Add a coil.
Select and copy the line where the applicable coil is included. Move to the
next line and paste.
ATTENTION
190
If check duplicated coil instantly is used, the edit speed may be

slow.
Select Tools > Options > Edit Ladder/Mnemonic, on the Edit page,
select Check duplicated coil instantly option.
Check duplicated coil instantly checks the coil and the reverse coil,
positive transition pulse coil, and negative transition pulse coil.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
8. Programming
8.2. Used address
8.2
Used address
It shows all the addresses and the numbers used in the program (LD, SFC). The addresses
used in each address area according to the designated types are displayed as classified
into input and output.
a)
Address Display: Displays each address used in the program.
b)
Word Column: Displays the number of the applicable address types used in
the program. The column displays the number in accordance with the address
type designated when executing the address used.
c)
Bit Column: Displays the number of applicable bit addresses used in the
program. The addresses of S area, T area, and C area are displayed. The
column displays the addresses of the types smaller than those designated when
executing the used address in bit type. Therefore, if designating word type, it
displays the bit only. If the column designates 16 data types, 8 columns are
created.
d)
I/O classification: Displays the number of applicable bit addresses as

classified into input (I) and output (O).
e)
It displays 1 address using the 5th bit of %MW1 as the output.
f)
It displays 1 address using %MW2 as the input.
Viewing used address

To view a used address:
Step
Action
Click View > Used Address.
Select a desirable address on the Used I/O Selection Dialog window.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
191
8. Programming
8.2. Used address
Step
Action
The field description for Used I/O Selection Dialog window are as follows:
Field Label
Description
Address Area Selection
Selects an address area. The available areas

are All.
Address Type Selection
Selects an address type, Bit.
ATTENTION
Select Update Used Address on the context menu to display the

used addresses
Editing the program after Used Address is executed, does not update
the content of the Used Address automatically. If you want to see the
Used Address of edited program, again select Update Used
Address.
View address uses

Double-click the cell where the used I/O figures are displayed or click View Address
Uses from the context menu. The View Address Uses window displays.
The field description for View Address Uses are as follows:
Field Label
192
Description
PLC
Displays the PLC name with the applicable Address

used.
Address used
It is the Address that the View Address Uses window

shows.
Program
Displays the program name with the applicable Address

used.
Address
Displays the address used in the program.
Type
Displays the address type used in the program.
IN/OUT
Displays whether the address is used as Input or

Output.
Instruction
Displays the instruction type of operand for which the

applicable address is used. (Displayed as identical as
Honeywell
R200
January 2011
8. Programming
8.3. Check program
Field Label
Description
the instruction tool bar of LD editor.)
8.3
Position
Displays the position in the program.
Comment
Displays the comment of a selected address.
Go To
The function to go to the program using the address of a

selected line.
Check program
This function is used to check the prepared LD program for errors. The following items
are checked.
Logic Error: checks for LD connection errors.
Grammar Error: checks for grammatical errors used in SBRT/CALL,

FOR/NEXT, and so on.
Duplicated Coil Error: checks for errors if duplicate output items are used.
Check program setting

To check a program setting:
Step
1
Action
Click View > Check Program. The Program Check window displays. By
default, Program Check tab is selected.
The field description for Program Check window are as follows:
Field Label
Description
Program Check Tab
R200
January 2011
Logic Error
Used to check for programs logic errors such as

LD connection errors and short circuit.
Grammar Error
Used to check for errors in the application

instructions such as CALL/SBRT,
MCS/MCSCLR, and so on.
Unreferenced label
Used to specify the processing range of the

declared label which was not used. You can
select Ignore, Warning or Error.

Honeywell
193
8. Programming
8.3. Check program
Step
Action
Unreferenced
subroutine
Used to specify the processing range of the

declared subroutine which was not used. You
can select Ignore, Warning or Error.
Duplicated coil error
Used to check for the Duplicated Coil error.
Strict check on data

type
Used to select Error or Warning for the

Duplicated Coil.
Check program size
Displays program size when checking.
Report unused
variables
Displays unused variables when checking.
Current program
(modbus)
Used to check the current program only.
All programs
Used to check all the programs listed on the

current PLC item.
Duplicate Coil Check Tab

Checking Address
Specification
Sets the address and variable area to check.
Checking Option
Designates whether to check duplicated coil

for a function (block) output.
OK
Click to save the setting and to close the

window.
Cancel
ATTENTION
194
Ignore: Used to ignore errors.
Warning: If any error occurs, a Warning is displayed on the Result

Window and writing a program on PLC is available.
Error: If any error occurs, Error is displayed on the Result Window and
writing a program on PLC is unavailable.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
8. Programming
8.3. Check program
ATTENTION
For additional details on Logic Error and Grammar Error, refer to

Logic error and Grammar error.
If the current program is selected while one or more programs are

listed on the current PLC item, CALL/SBRT is not checked.
When writing a program on the PLC, all the items except the
Duplicated Coil are always checked even if it is not specified by the
user.
In the 2MLI series of PLC, many programs can be added to the PLC
item and the SBRT call is available between programs.
ATTENTION
Set coil (-(S)-) and Reset coil (-(R)-) are not checked for Duplicate
Coil.
In the Function (block) output check, the range is determined by the

parameter type.
Check result trace

If any error occurs on the program, its details are displayed on the Program Inspect tab of
the message window. Double-click the error details to move to the location where the
error occurs.
Logic error
It is used to check for any logic error, and displays its details and location.
1.
L0000: Input or output is not connected. This error occurs if the contact point is not
connected with the power line.
Action: Correct the LD program to prevent an input-output disconnect.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
195
8. Programming
8.3. Check program
2.
L0100: It is a short circuit. This error occurs if the area connected with the OR is
connected with the horizontal line without the contact point.
Action: Delete OR if the OR connection is not necessary any more, or enter the contact
point in the applicable location.
3.
L0200: Address or variable is not input. This error occurs if the address or variable
is not input in the contact point or coil.
Action: Input a proper address in the contact point or coil where the error occurs.
4.
196
L0300: OR-LOAD incorrectly connected. This error occurs if OR-LOAD is

connected incorrectly.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
8. Programming
8.3. Check program
Action: Search for OR-LOAD incorrectly connected and then correct the LD program.
5.
L0400: Specified number of contact points is exceeded. This error occurs if the
number of continuous LOAD instructions exceeds 32.
Action: Correct the LD program to limit the LOAD instructions within 32.
6.
R200
January 2011
L0401: Incorrect input. This error occurs if the input necessary is nonexistent.

Honeywell
197
8. Programming
8.3. Check program
Action: Add the necessary input to the input terminal.
7.
L0402: Incorrect input. This error occurs if the input unnecessary is existent.
Action: Delete the input unnecessary from the input terminal.
8.
198
L0404: The maximum number of MPUSH exceeded. This error occurs if the
number of continuous MPUSH/MPOP exceeds 16.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
8. Programming
8.3. Check program
Action: Correct the LD program to limit the continuous MPUSH/MPOP to 16.

9.
L0406: Application instruction in error. This error occurs if the application

instruction is not existent in the 2MLI series PLC used.
Action: Replace the instruction with the one provided by the 2MLI series of PLC.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
199
8. Programming
8.3. Check program
ATTENTION
This error occurs if GMWIN series PLC project file is converted to 2MLI
project.
Grammar error
This function is used to check for grammar related errors generated when an application
instruction is used.
1.
E1001: Label declared as duplicate. This error occurs if duplicated LABEL is used.
Action: Delete the duplicated label, or change the name of the label.
E1002: Label Name is nonexistent. This error occurs if JMP is used to refer to the
nonexistent label.
Action: Add the label where the error occurs, or correct the JMP instruction which uses
the label.
200
E1003: Label Name is not used. This error occurs if the JMP instruction is not used
in the program.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
8. Programming
8.3. Check program
Action: Delete the label, or add the application JMP instruction.
E1004: Label Name not used in the subroutine. This error occurs if the JMP
instruction is not used in the program.
Action: Delete the label in the subroutine, or add the application JMP instruction.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
201
8. Programming
8.3. Check program
ATTENTION
The error number E1003/E1004 occurs only when Warning or Error

is selected for the label not referred in the Grammar Error, not
selected in the View > Check Program option. For additional
information, refer Check program.
E1005: Label Name is nonexistent in the subroutine. This error occurs if the JMP
instruction uses the label nonexistent in the subroutine.
Action: Add the label in the subroutine, or correct the JMP instruction.
E2001: Return instruction is nonexistent in the subroutine, Subroutine Name. The

subroutine is finished with the RET instruction.
Action: Add the RET instruction in the subroutine block.

202

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
8. Programming
8.3. Check program
E2010: Subroutine call is nonexistent. The call of nonexistent SBRT causes an error.
Action: Add the SBRT~RET blocks of the subroutine name to call.
E2003: Subroutine Name is positioned prior to END instruction. SBRT and RET
positioned prior to END instruction causes an error.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
203
8. Programming
8.3. Check program
Action: Move the application instructions SBRT and RET to the position after the end of
the instruction.
E2011: Subroutine not used. Although SBRT~RET blocks exist, no CALL

instruction is available to use the applicable subroutine.
Action: Delete the subroutine not being used, or add the CALL instruction.
204

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
8. Programming
8.3. Check program
ATTENTION
The error number E2011 occurs only when Warning or Error is

selected for the subroutine not referred to in the Grammar Error
Inspect item. For additional information, refer Check program.
E2012: Subroutine declared as duplicate. Subroutine Name: An identical name of

the subroutine cannot be used.
Action: Change the duplicated name of the subroutine.
E2014: The maximum number of subroutines exceeded. Based on the PLC type, the
maximum number of subroutines is exceeded.
Action: Check the number of the subroutines used.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
205
8. Programming
8.3. Check program
ATTENTION
The maximum number of subroutines usable depends on the PLC

type. For details, refer to 2MLI CPU users guide.
E3001: Equal number of NEXT unavailable. If the number FOR/NEXT instructions

are not equal, it causes this error.
Action: Let the number of FOR instructions and NEXT instructions be the same.
E3002: Equal number of FOR unavailable. If the number FOR/NEXT instructions

are not equal, it causes this error.
Action: Let the number of FOR instructions and NEXT instructions be identical.
206

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
8. Programming
8.3. Check program
E3003: FOR-NEXT cannot be nested more than 16 times. FOR/NEXT can be

duplicated up to 16 blocks. If the number of the duplicated FOR/NEXT blocks
exceeds 16, it causes an error.
Action: Limit the number of the FOR/NEXT blocks not to exceed 16.
E3004: Between FOR-NEXT, RET or END is not available. If RET or END is

included between FOR and NEXT, it causes an error.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
207
8. Programming
8.3. Check program
Action: Change the location of the END and RET instruction positioned between
FOR/NEXT blocks.
E3005: BREAK singly used. BREAK instruction can be used only between
FOR/NEXT blocks.
Action: Change the location of BREAK instruction.
00002: needs one or more scan program. There is no scan program in the current
PLC item, which causes an error.
Action: Add an applicable program item to the Project Scan Program.
00003: There is no program to check. There is no program in the current PLC item.
Action: Add a scan program and try again.
E1300: An element (instruction) not available in user-defined function (UDF).
Action: The function block and positive (negative) transition pulse contact point (coil)
are not available in UDF.
208

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
8. Programming
8.3. Check program
ATTENTION
The elements cannot be inserted in UDF Edit but they can be

inserted by using Paste and other functions in other programs.
E1310: The return value needs at least, one or more outputs.
Action: The VAR_RETURN type variable is not designated in UDF, which causes an
error. Check whether the variable is used in the program.
E1400: needs the TRANS output.
Action: TRANS variable is not designated as the output in the SFC Transition Program
created by LD, which causes an error. Check whether the variable is used as output in the
program.
E5000: Needs one or more INIT_DONE instruction to end the initialization task.
Action: Although the initialization task is added, the conditions to end the initialization
task are not designated. To normally end the scan program, the conditions to end the
initialization task must be designated.
L0700: Undeclared variable
Action: The variable used as the IO parameter of contact point, coil, and function
(Block) is not declared. Check whether the variable is declared in the local variable.
L0701: Input unsuitable data type.
Action: The type of used address or variable is not suitable. Check the type of used
address or variable.
L0702: Invalid input connection
Action: The line connection of function (block) is only available for BOOL type. The
input here needs a non-BOOL type input.
L0703: Function (block) cannot have more than one input line.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
209
8. Programming
8.3. Check program
Action: Check the connection to ensure that the Function (block) does not have more
than one input line.
L0704: Invalid output connection
Action: The line connection of function (block) is only available for BOOL type. Since
line cannot be connected to other type but BOOL, check the line output.
L0705: Function (block) must not have more than one output line.
Action: Function (block) must not have more than one output line. Check the line
connection.
210
L0706: Incorrect function IO type.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
8. Programming
8.3. Check program
Action: In case of the function (block) having ANY type as the IO parameter, the data
type of IO parameter indicated as ANY type must be the same. Check the data type of the
input IO parameter.
ATTENTION
If the strict data type check is not set in the program check options, it
checks the only IO parameter size of the function (block).
L0707: The size of array is not same.
Action: The size of array used in MOVE function as the IO parameter must be same.
L0708: Unknown function.
Action: Unavailable function. Check whether the function is user-defined function.
L0709: Instance name is omitted.
Action: The instance name is omitted in the function block. Check the input items.
L0710: Instance type is not the same.
Action: The instance type of function block is not identical with the function block.
Check the input items.
L0711: Undeclared instance.
Action: The function block instance is not declared in the local variable. Declare the
function block instance in the local variable before use.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
211
8. Programming
8.3. Check program
212

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
9. Find/Replace
9.1
Find address
The Find/Replace function is used to find or change the address and the string in LD,
SFC, and Variable/Comment of SoftMaster.
Perform the following steps to find an address.
Step
1
Action
Click Find/Replace > Find Address. The Find Address window displays.
The field description for Find Address window are as follows:
Field Label
R200
January 2011
Description
Find what
Used to specify the address to find.
Include all subaddresses/vari

able names
Used to select the address type containing the address

to find. Then, if you select the checkbox, it finds
%IB0.1.0, %IW0.1.0, %IL0.1.0, and others containing
%IX0.1.1.
Output to pane
2
SoftMaster has two Find result windows. The result

displays in Find 1 result window, but if you select the
Output to pane 2, the result displays in Find 2 result
window.
Direction
Used to specify the location to find upward or downward

from the line currently selected in the respective editor.
Range
Selects to find by designating a specific line after

designating the direction. If Range is selected, the start
and end lines must be also entered.
Find Next
Finds the detail specified, next to the line (position)

currently selected. If the applicable address is found, the
position where the applicable address is located is
selected.
Find All
Finds all the details specified above to display the result

on the find result window.
Advanced>>
It is only applicable in LD editor. Click Advanced>> to

expand the selection. Used to find specific contact point,
coil, extended function, and function/function block used
in LD editor.
Honeywell
213
9. Find/Replace
9.1. Find address
Step
Action
ATTENTION
The result is displayed on the find window only with Find All run.
Since Find All finds all details in the applicable documents, it is

insignificant to select the direction.
Advanced>> is displayed only in Ladder editor.
Advanced>> (extension) is as shown in the following figure.
Find next address

It is used for LD, SFC, IL, Global/Direct Variable, Variable and Local Variable in
common.
Based on LD, details of this function are described as follows:
Perform the following steps to find the next address.
Step
214
Action
Select the basic cell of the direction.
Specify the address to find, the direction, and the options.
Click Find Next. If address is found identical to the detail as specified on the
dialog box, move to the address whose cell is identical.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
9. Find/Replace
9.2. Find text
ATTENTION
If no address identical to the specified address is found, the following

message appears.
Find Next finds all the current programs based on the selected cell
when the address find dialog box displays. If the direction is set
Downward, it starts finding the address from the cell next to the
selected cell to the last cell of the program, and then from the starting
cell of the program.
Find all address

It is used for LD, SFC, IL, Global/Direct Variable, and Local Variable in common.
Based on LD, the details of this function are described and perform the following steps to
find all addresses.
Step
Action
Specify the address to find, the direction and the options.
Click Find All. Find All yields its result on the find message window as in the
following figure.
On the find window, select the line to find and then click Enter to move the
cell to the line of the applicable LD program.
ATTENTION
Find All finds the address in all the programs included in the current PLC.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
215
9. Find/Replace
9.2. Find text
9.2
Find text
Finding text
This function is used to find the String of Rung Comment, Variable, Variable Comment,
Application Instruction, and Label.
It is used for LD, SFC, IL, Global/Direct Variable, Variable and Local Variable.
Based on LD, the details of this function are described as follows:
Perform the following steps to find text.
Step
Action
Click Find/Replace > Find Text. The Find String window displays.
The field description for Find String window are as follows:
Field Label
216
Description
Find what:
Used to specify the String to find.
Match whole word only
Selecting All Identical finds the string exactly

identical to the string specified in detail to find. If
it is not selected, it also finds the string where
the detail to find is included.
Case-sensitive
Selecting this option finds the string exactly

identical to the string.
Output to pane 2
SoftMaster has two find result windows. The

result displays in the Find 1 result window, but if
you select the Output to pane 2, the result
displays in Find 2 result window.
Direction
Used to specify the location to find upward or

downward from the line currently selected in the
respective editor.
Find Next
Finds the detail specified, next to the line

(position) currently selected. If the applicable
String is found, the position where the
applicable String is located is selected.
Find All
Finds all the details specified to display the

result in the Find result window.
Honeywell
R200
January 2011
9. Find/Replace
9.2. Find text
Step
Action
Range
If Range is selected, Find String is run in a

specific step. If you select Range, you must
enter the start and last steps.
Advanced>>
It is only applicable in LD editor. Click

Advanced>> to expand and Advanced<< to
close the selection. It is used to find specific
contact point, specific coil and application
instruction used in LD editor.
Specify the String to find, the selection options, and the direction.
Click Find Next. If a string identical to the specified detail is found on the
dialog box, it moves to the string whose cell is identical.
ATTENTION
If no string identical to the specified string is found, the following

message appears.
Find Next finds the current programs based on the selected cell
when the String Find dialog box displays. If the direction is set
Downward, it begins finding the String from the cell next to the
selected cell to the last cell of the program, and then from the starting
cell of the program.
ATTENTION
R200
January 2011
The result is displayed on the Find windows 1 or 2 only when Find All
is run.
Since Find All finds all details in the applicable documents, the
direction is not significant to select.
Advanced>> is displayed only in LD editor.

Honeywell
217
9. Find/Replace
9.2. Find text
Find all text

It is used for LD, SFC, IL, Global/Direct Variable and Local Variable in common.
Perform the following steps to find a particular text.
Step
Action
Click Find/Replace > Find String. The Find String window displays.
Specify the string to find, the selection options, and the direction.
Click Find All. Find All displays the results on the find message window as in
the following figure.
On the find window, select the line to find and then click Enter to move the
cell to the line of the applicable LD program.
ATTENTION
Find All finds the string in all the programs included in the current PLC.
218

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
9. Find/Replace
9.3. Address replacement
9.3
Address replacement
Replace address
This function is used to change the address previously made in LD Editor, IL Editor, or
Variable/Comment Editor.
It is used for LD editor, SFC editor and Variable/Comment. This function is used to find
a previously created address. Details of this function are described as follows based on
LD.
Perform the following steps to replace an address.
Step
Action
Click Find/Replace > Replace Address. The Replace Address window

displays.
Specify the details to find and replace the type and the direction.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
219
9. Find/Replace
Step
Action
The field description for Replace Address window are as follows:
Field Label
220
Description
Find what
Used to specify the address to find.
Replace with
Used to specify the address to replace with.
Find including lower

type
If you select the checkbox when finding the

address containing the address input in Find
With, it finds %IB0.1.0, %ID0.1.0, %IL0.1.0
and others including %IX0.1.1.
Replace with range
Used to replace with a range. If the number of

address and the range matches the addresses
can be changed instantly.
Include Variable
Selects whether to replace the

variable/comment of the input address with the
variable/comment of the address to replace.
That is, selects whether to replace with the
variable/comment of the address.
Range
Designates the number of address for replace

with range. It is activated only if you select the
checkbox, Replace with range.
Area
Selects whether to include by address types. If

hanging %IL0.0.1, for instance, they can be
replaced with range by selecting bit, byte, word
and double word less than L area,
respectively.
Direction

downward from the line currently selected in
the corresponding editor.
Range
If selecting Range, Address Change can be

run within a specific line. If you select Range,
you must enter the start and last lines.
Find Next
Finds the details specified, in the next to the

line (position) currently selected. If the
applicable address is found, the position where
the applicable address is located is selected.
Replace
Replaces the address as specified above

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
9. Find/Replace
Step
Action
based on the currently selected position (line).
Replace All
Replaces all the details specified above after

found.
Advanced>>
It is only used in Ladder editor. Click

Advanced>> to expand and Advanced<< to
close the selection. It is used to find specific
contact point, specific coil and extended
function/function block used in Ladder editor.
Click Replace. The selected cell is replaced with the address specified for
replacement.
ATTENTION
Replace finds all the current programs based on the selected cell
when the address Replace dialog box displays. If the direction is set
downward, it starts to find the address identical from the cell selected
to the last of the programs, and then the address identical, again from
the first of the programs to the basic cell.
The direction need not be selected in case of Replace All.
If Replace with range is selected, Replace All only is available.
Advanced>> is displayed only in LD editor.
Replace all addresses

It is used for the LD editor, SFC editor and Variable/Comment editor. This is used to find
the previously created address.
Replacing all addresses
Perform the following steps to replace all addresses.
Step
Action
Click Find/Replace > Replace Address. The Replace Address window.
Specify the details to find and replace the type and the direction.
Click Replace All.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
221
9. Find/Replace
Step
4
Action
Once the Replace All is completed in the current program, the following
message appears.
Replace with range

It is used to change consecutive addresses in bulk. For example, the addresses of %MX1
~ %MX10 can be changed to %MX100 ~ %MX109.
Example, if the detail to find is %MX1, the detail to change %MX100 and the number of
address is 10.
Perform the following steps to replace the number of addresses with a range:
Step
Action
Click Find/Replace > Replace Address.
Specify the details to Find and Replace the type and the direction, Select
Replace with Range check box and then enter the number of addresses to
replace with range.
Click Replace All.
ATTENTION
Replace with range is available only for the addresses, not for the constants.
222

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
9. Find/Replace
9.4. Text replacement
9.4
Text replacement
Replace text string

This function is used to find and replace the text string of Comment, Variable, and so on,
except the address.
It is used for LD editor, SFC editor and Variable/Comment editor in common. It is used
to find the previously created addresses. Based on LD, the details of this function are
described as follows.
ATTENTION
Advanced>> is displayed only in Ladder editor.
Perform the following steps to replace a string.

Step
Action
Click Find/Replace > Replace String. The Replace String window displays.
Specify the String to find and replace the selection options and the direction.
The field description for Replace String window are as follows:
Field Label
R200
January 2011
Description
Replace With
Used to specify the string to find.
Find What
Used to specify the string to replace.
Match whole
word only
If Match whole word only is selected, it finds the

string exactly identical to the string specified.
Case-sensitive
If you select this check box, it finds the string only

exactly identical to the string with case-sensitive
characters sorted out. If not selected, it finds the
string in characters not sorted out.
Include variable
If you select this check box, the variable is also

replaced as applicable when the string is replaced. If
this is not selected, the variable is not included in the
replace when the string is replaced.
Direction

downward from the line currently selected in the
respective editor.
Honeywell
223
9. Find/Replace
9.4. Text replacement
Step
Action
Range
If you select a range, replace string can be run within

a specific line. If you select Range, you must enter
the first and last steps.
Find Next
Finds the detail specified, in the next to the line

(position) currently selected. If the applicable string is
found, the cell moves to the position where the
applicable string is located.
Replace
Replaces the detail specified above after found.
Replace All
Replaces all the details specified have been found.
Advanced>>
It is only used in Ladder editor. Click Advanced>> to

expand and Advanced<< to close the selection. It is
used to find specific contact point, specific coil,
extended function, function/function block used in
Ladder editor.
Click Replace. The selected string is replaced with the string specified for
replacement.
ATTENTION
224
Replace is available only when the string of the cell currently

selected is identical to the detail to find as specified on the dialog
box.
Click Replace to move to the next cell identical to the detail to find as
specified on the dialog box regardless of the execution of Replace.
when the address Replace dialog box displays.
when the address Replace dialog box displays. If the direction is set
downward, it starts to find the address identical from the cell selected
to the last of the programs, and then the address identical again from
the first of the programs to the basic cell.
when the Replace String dialog box displays. If the direction is set
downward, it starts to find the string identical from the cell selected to
the last of the programs, and then again from the first of the programs
to the basic cell.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
9. Find/Replace
9.5. Find again
Replace all string

It is used for LD editor, SFC editor and Variable/Comment editor. It is used to find the
previously created address.
Perform the following steps to replace all strings.
9.5
Step
Action
Click Find/Replace > Replace String. The Replace String window displays.
Specify the details to Find and Replace the selection options and the direction.
Click Replace All.
If Replace All is complete in the current program, the following message

appears for you to decide to Replace in the other programs.
Find again
Find Again is used to find the details of Find Address or Find String again if once run
previously. If Find was not run previously, it is inactive.
Select Find/Replace > Find Again.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
225
9. Find/Replace
9.5. Find again
226

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
10. Parameters
10.1 Basic parameter
Basic parameter setting
It is used to specify the basic parameters related with the PLC operation.
To access Basic Parameter settings:
Step
Action
On the project tree, double-click Parameter > Basic Parameter. The Basic
Parameter Setting window displays.
The field description for Basic Parameter Setting > Basic Operation Setup
window are as follows:
R200
January 2011
Field Label
Description
Fixed period operation
Used to decide to run the PLC program based

on the fixed period operation or based on the
scan time. Type the operation time in ms unit.
Watchdog timer
Used to specify the time value of the scan

watch-dog timer to keep PLC from stopping due
to program error.
Standard Input Filter
Used to specify the standard input value. For

more details, refer Detailed module information
setting.
Restart Method
Sets the restart mode. Select either cold or

warm restart.
Disable the reset

switch
When this option is selected, the switch is

moved to left side and return to normal position.
Disable the overall

reset switch

moved to left side and pressed it for more than
3 seconds and then returns to normal position.
Output during
debugging
Used to decide to output the data to the module

as usual or not even while being debugged.
Keep Output when an

error occurs

as usual or not even when an error or a specific
input occurs.

Honeywell
227
10. Parameters
10.1. Basic parameter
Step
228
Action
Keep Output when
converting RUN>STOP

as usual or not even when PLC operation mode
changes from RUN to STOP.
Keep Output when

converting STOP>RUN

as usual or not even when PLC operation mode
changes from STOP to RUN.
Save the latest SOE

events
Used to save the most recent SOE events.
Save the first SOE

events
Used to save the first SOE event.
Disable the D.CLR

reset switch

moved to right side and return to normal
position. The general data area and retain area
(M, Automatic variable) is cleared.
Disable the overall

D.CLR reset switch

moved to left side and pressed it for more than
3 seconds and then returns to normal position.
The general data area, retain area (M,
Automatic variable) and R area are cleared.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
10. Parameters
Step
Action
Retain Area Setup: Sets the options necessary for Retain Area in the Basic
Parameter information.
M area Retain setting: Sets the M area (retain area) to preserve the data
when PLC is restarted.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
229
10. Parameters
Step
3
Action
Error Operation Setup tab: Specifies the operation method when an error
occurs on the PLC.
The field description for Basic Parameter Setting > Error Operation Setup
Field Label
Description
Continue running
when a fuse error
occurs
If this option is selected, the PLC runs even if

an error occurs on the fuse connection status of
the module during PLC RUN.
Continue running
when an I/O module
error occurs
If you select this option, the PLC runs even if an

error occurs on an I/O module during PLC RUN.
Continue running
when a special module
error occurs

error occurs on the special module during PLC
RUN.
Continue running
when a communication
module error occurs

error occurs on the communication module.
Continue running
when an extended
base error occurs

error occurs in the extended base.
TIP
Configure the Snet module before configuring the Modbus Server or client in
serial mode.
Configure the FEnet module before configuring the Modbus Server or client in
TCP mode.
The above settings are accomplished on an extra port in the CPU which is
exclusively for Modbus Server in the Serial Mode which eliminates the need
for using extra Snet or FEnet module. Refer to the 2MLI CPUU guide to
check whether your CPU supports this additional option.
230

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
10. Parameters
ATTENTION
Restart Mode
Restart mode is used to define the restart method of CPU when a Restart
command is issued to the CPU.
Cold Restart
To initiate a cold restart, set the restart mode as cold restart.

All data is cleared and the initial value of variables is set to zero.
Even though the parameter is set to warm restart mode, it starts in cold
restart mode when it is run just after the program is changed.
Pressing RESET switch during operation (same with online reset instruction),
starts in the cold restart mode, regardless of the restart mode set in the
parameter.
1.
It is run when setting the restart mode of the parameter as warm restart.
2.
In case of a warm restart, the following happen:
3.
R200
January 2011
Warm Restart
The data set to remain the previous value.
The data set only with the initial value are set with the initial values.
All other data is cleared to 0.
If data is abnormal although the parameter is set in the warm restart

(data preservation against interruption is not available), it is run in the
cold restart mode.

Honeywell
231
10. Parameters
10.2. I/O parameters
10.2 I/O parameters

Setting I/O parameters
It is used to specify the I/O type configured in the PLC slot and to set the applicable
parameters for each slot.
To access I/O Parameters settings:
Step
1
2
Action
On the project tree, double-click Parameter > I/O Parameters. The I/O
Parameter Setting window displays.
The field description for I/O Parameter Setting window are as follows:
Field Label
232
Description
All Base
Displays base module information and module

information per slot. In case module is not
designated in slot, it is displayed as Default.
Set Base
Displays the already set base.
Module List
Displays the base module information and the

module information based on slots. If no module
is configured in the slot.
Slot Information
Edits or displays bases module type for each

slot.
Delete Slot
Deletes all information of the currently selected

slot.
Delete Base
Deletes all information of the currently selected

base.
Base Setting
Sets base number of currently selected base.
Delete All
Deletes the configured module and information

of all bases.
Details
Displays detailed module information.
Print
Prints the module type and the modules

parameter information specified in the slot.
OK
Click to save the changes and to close the dialog

box.
Honeywell
R200
January 2011
10. Parameters
Step
Action
Cancel
ATTENTION
The 2MLI project type supports the only fixed allocation type.
Therefore, the allocation information column is always displayed as
disabled.
Fixed point assignment and variable point assignment are available

for the module assignment method. The fixed point assignment
assigns 64 points collectively to a slot while the variable point
assignment depends on the module type. Exceptionally 32 points is
assigned to the special/communication module, and 16 points to the
empty slot.
The table below shows the differences between variable assignment

and fixed assignment, based on the basic base.
Slot
Variable
Assignment
Module Name
Fixed Assignment
16-point Input
P00000 ~ P0000F
P00000 ~ P0003F
16-point Output
P00010 ~ P0001F
P00040 ~ P0007F
A/D Module
P00020 ~ P0002F
P00080 ~ P0011F
Communication
Module
P00030 ~ P0003F
P00120 ~ P0015F
16-point Output
P00050 ~ P0005F
P00200 ~ P0023F
For additional information on the communication module information setting,
refer SoftMaster-NM Users Guide.
For additional information on the positioning module, refer APM Users Guide.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
233
10. Parameters
Base module setup

Setting the information for a base module
It is used to specify the base information about a module.
Perform the following steps to set the Base Module Information.
Step
Action
Select the base module to specify from the address list (Base 00 to Base 07).
Right-click and select Base Setting or click Base Setting. The Base Module
Setup window displays.
The field description for I/O Parameter Setting window are as follows:
Field Label
Description
Slot
Used to enter the maximum number of slots in

the base.
OK
Click to save the changes and to close the

window.
Cancel
ATTENTION
If the specified number of slots is less than the maximum number of

slots, the remaining area is not unavailable for editing.
Delete base module

Perform the following steps to delete the Base Module Information:
Step
234
Action
Select the base module to delete from the address list.
Right-click and select Delete Base.
You are prompted to confirm the deletion. Click OK to delete the information
of the applicable base module.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
10. Parameters
Module information setting based on slots

Module type and detailed module information is described based on slots.
Perform the following steps to set the module information settings based on slots:
Step
Action
Select the slot to specify the module in the slot information.
Select the Module from the drop-down list or right-click and select Edit to
view the list of modules.
This is applicable only when a module is already configured in the slot.
Select the module from the list.
ATTENTION
The module description can contain a maximum of 128 English characters.
I/O parameter edit function

Data editing details of Copy, Cut and Paste, based on slots is described as follows:
Copy/paste
Perform the following steps to copy and paste a selected slot.
Step
Action
Select the slot to copy.
Right-click the module and select Copy.
Select the slot to paste.
Right-click and select Paste.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
235
10. Parameters
Cut/paste
Perform the following steps to cut and paste a selected slot.
Step
Action
Select the slot to cut.
Right-click and select Cut.
Select the slot to paste.
Right-click and select Paste.
Undo
Perform the following steps to undo a particular action.
Step
Action
Select the slot to delete.
Right-click and select Delete.
Right-click and select Undo.
ATTENTION
A maximum of 20 last actions can be revoked using the Undo feature.
Redo
To redo a particular action:
Right-click and select Redo.

ATTENTION
236
A maximum of 20 actions can be revoked or invoked using the Undo

and Redo functions.
The shortcut keys used in I/O Parameters Edit cannot be used as the
user-defined shortcut key specified in SoftMaster.
Click once on a slot to select one slot. To select multiple slots, click
on a slot and drag it down to multiple slots.
Honeywell
R200
January 2011
10. Parameters
Detailed module information setting

Double-click or click Details to view the detailed module information setting.
Input module setting
Perform the following steps to set input module setting.
Step
Action
Double-click I/O Parameters from the tree-view. The I/O Parameter setting
window displays.
Double-click an input module. The Input Module Setting dialog box displays.
The field description for Input Module Setting dialog box are as follows:
Field Label
R200
January 2011
Description
Filter
Used to specify the filter constant value for

the input.
OK
Click to save the specified details and to

close the dialog box.
Cancel
Click OK to apply the setting.

Honeywell
237
10. Parameters
ATTENTION
Digital module with the input of AC cannot specify the filter value.
Standard value of the input filter is specified in basic parameters. For

more information, refer to Basic parameter.
The input filter used for checking the input signal does not change for
the filtering time. The following figure is with the input filter value of
3ms. As the input signal is the same for 3ms from the moment
detected, it is processed as normal input signal after 3ms.
Output module
Perform the following steps to set output module setting.
238
Step
Action
Double-click I/O Parameters from the tree-view. The I/O Parameter Setting
window displays.
Double-click an output module. The Output Module Setting dialog box

displays.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
10. Parameters
Step
Action
The field description for Output Module Setting dialog box are as follows:
Field Label
Description
Channel
One channel is assigned for 8 points, and the

emergency output mode can be specified per
channel.
OK

Cancel
ATTENTION
Emergency output value is specified when the CPU is abruptly

stopped during RUN.
Default for the emergency output is Hold.
Module reservation
It assigns the points of the module only without any specific module specified. The 16,
32, and 64 points are available for the assignment.
Analog Input module
On the I/O Parameter Setting window, select Analog Input module and then click
Details to view the Parameter Setting dialog box.
Perform the following steps to set Analog Input module setting.
Step
Action
window displays.
Double-click an A/I module. The Analog Input Module Setting dialog box
displays.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
239
10. Parameters
Step
Action
The field description for Analog Input Module Setting dialog box are as
follows:
Field Label
Description
All Parameters Settings
If you select this option, it changes all the

channels applicable parameter values.
Maximum/Minimum
Value Display
If the user inputs data, an applicable range

displays on the lower-half of the dialog box
automatically. If the user changes the
parameter value to any other value other than
the default, the string color changes from
Black to Blue.
OK

Cancel
The parameter values are as follows:

Parameter
Channels
Input Range
Output Type
240
Setting Items
Default
Disable/Enable
Disable
1~5V/0~5V/0~10V/-10~10V (Voltage Type)
1~5V
4~20mA/0~20mA (Current Type)
4~20mA
0~16000/-8000~8000/1000-5000/0~10000%
0~16000
(Input range changes based on items)
Filter Process
Disable/Enable
Disable
Filter Constants
1-99
Average Process
Disable/Enable
Disable
Average Method
Count Average/Time Average
Count Average
Average Value
Count Average: 2-64000, Time Average: 416000

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
10. Parameters
Analog output module

On the I/O Parameters Setting window, select Analog Output module and then click
Details to view the Parameters Setting dialog box.
Perform the following steps to set Analog Output module setting.
Step
Action
window displays.
Double-click an A/O module. The Analog Output Module Setting dialog box
displays.
The field description for Analog Output Module Setting dialog box are as
follows:
Field Label
Description
All Parameters Settings

Maximum/Minimum
Value Display

Black to Blue.
OK

Cancel
Click OK to apply the setting

Parameter
Channels
Output Range
R200
January 2011
Setting Items
Default
STOP/RUN
STOP
1~5V/0~5V/0~10V/10~10V (Voltage Type)
1~5V
4~20mA/0~20mA
(Current Type)

Honeywell
4~20mA
241
10. Parameters
Parameter
Setting Items
Default
0~16000/8000~8000/10005000/0~10000%
Input Type
0~16000
(changes based on output

range)
Channel Output Type
Previous/minimum/middle
/maximum Value
Previous Value
High-speed counter module

On the I/O Parameters Setting window, select High Speed counter module and then
click Details to view the Parameters Setting dialog box.
Perform the following steps to set high-speed counter module setting.
Step
Action
window displays.
Double-click a high speed counter module. The High-Speed Counter

Module Setting dialog box displays.
The field description for High-Speed Counter Module Setting dialog box are
as follows:
Field Label
242
Description
Parameter Area

Maximum/Minimum
Value Display

Black to Blue.
OK

Cancel

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
10. Parameters

Parameter
Counter Mode
Setting Items
Linear Counter/Ring Counter
Default
Linear Counter
2-phase 1-multiplier/2-phase 2multiplier/

2-phase 4-multiplier/CW-CCW/
Pulse Input Mode
1-phase 1-input 1-multiplier/

1-phase 1-input 2-multiplier/
2-phase
1-multiplier
1-phase 2-input 1-multiplier/1-phase 2input 2-multiplier

N/A/Count clear/Count latch/
Additional Function
Mode
Sampling count/Measure input

frequency
N/A
Measure rotations per unit time/Count

Disable
Range Value (ms)
0-60000
(Single Compare) less/(Single

Compare) less or equal/
Compared Output 0
Mode
(Single Compare) equal/(Single Compare)

equal or greater/
(Single Compare) greater/(Section
Compare) included/ (Section
Compare)excluded
(Single Compare)
less
(Single Compare)
Compared Output 1
Mode
As identical as specified above
Preset Input Value
-2147483648-2147483647
Ring Counter,
Minimum Value
-2147483648-2147483647
Ring Counter,
Maximum Value
-2147483648-2147483647
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
less
243
10. Parameters
Parameter
Setting Items
Default
Compared Output 0
Minimum Setting
Value
-2147483648-2147483647
Compared Output 0
Maximum Setting
Value
-2147483648-2147483647
Compared Output 1
Minimum Setting
Value
-2147483648-2147483647
Compared Output 1
Maximum Setting
Value
-2147483648-2147483647
Number of Pulses per

Rotation
0-60000
Frequency Display
mode
1Hz/10Hz/100Hz/1000Hz
1Hz
ATTENTION
Pulse/Rev value option among High-speed counter parameter option is
active when the Auxiliary Mode is set to Revolution/Unit time.
For additional information on the communication module, see SoftMaster NM
Manual.
For additional information on the positioning module, see the APM manual.
244

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
10. Parameters
I/O parameter print function

This function is used for printing the specified I/O parameter and detailed module
information specified.
Print option setting
To print the specified I/O parameter:
On I/O Parameter Setting window, select Print > Print. The Print window
displays.
R200
January 2011
a)
Print All: Prints all I/O configuration table and detailed module information.
b)
I/O Configuration Table: Prints I/O parameter's module setting details based
on slots, description and I/O information assigned.
c)
Detailed Info of Each Module: Prints the detailed module information for the
specified slot module.

Honeywell
245
10. Parameters
Print preview
Perform the following steps to view the Print Preview.
Step
Action
On the I/O Parameter Setting window, select Print > Print. The Print
window displays.
On the Print window, click Preview.
Copy to clipboard
It is used for copying the I/O parameter table to the clipboard, thus to add onto the String
editor, word processor or spread sheet.
To copy the data to windows clipboard:
On the I/O Parameter Setting window, select Print > Copy to Clipboard.
ATTENTION
Only I/O configuration table can be copied to clipboard.
246

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
11. Online
11.1 Connection options for the PLC
It is used to specify the connection network with the PLC.
Local connection setting
RS-232C or USB connection is available for Local Connection Setting.
Click Online > Connection Settings. The Online Settings window displays.
The field descriptions for Online Settings window are as follows:

Field
Description
Type
Used to specify communication media (RS-232C, USB, Ethernet, and

Modem) to connect to the PLC.
Depth
Used to specify the connection configuration (Remote 1 and Remote

2) with PLC.
Connect
Click to connect to PLC using the specified options.
Settings
Allows detailed setting based on the selected Connection Type.
Preview
Used to see a graphical preview of all Connect Options.
Timeout
interval
Time-out defines the time after which the attempt to establish

communication with the PLC is given up.
Retrial
times
Defines the number of times to retry connecting to the PLC if

communication connection fails.
Read/Write
data size in
PLC run
mode
Used to specify the frame size of the data to transfer. This option is
available only when the PLC operation is in Run mode. In other modes
of operation, data is transferred in the maximum frame size.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
247
11. Online
11.1. Connection options for the PLC
Using the local RS-232C

Perform the following steps to connect through the local RS-232C.
Step
Action
On the Online Settings window, select the Connection Type as RS-232C.
Click Setting to specify communication speed and communication COM port.
Click OK to save the Connection Options.
ATTENTION
248
Default is RS-232C COM1 with the communication speed of

115200bps.
38400bps and 115200bps available for communication speed.
Communication speed is 115200bps for 2MLK Series.
Communication ports of COM1 ~ COM8 are available.
If USB serial device is used, a virtual COM port is applied to the

communication port. Check the device administrator to ensure the
specified port number.
Connection in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM, address monitoring

and system monitoring are available with one PLC at the same time.
However, it is the same Connect Options.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
11. Online
Using the local USB

Perform the following steps to connect using the local USB.
Step
Action
On the Online Settings window, select the Connection Type as USB.
USB has no detailed setting options. Hence Setting is disabled.
ATTENTION
USB device driver has to be installed for the USB to connect to the
PLC. Install the USB device driver before attempting to connect to the
PLC.
The USB driver is automatically installed along with SoftMaster. For

more information, refer to Installing SoftMaster.
Remote 1 connect setting

Connecting using Ethernet
Perform the following steps to set the connection to Ethernet.
Step
Action
On the Online Settings window, select the Connection Type as Ethernet.
Click Setting to specify Ethernet IP.

Specify the IP address of the PLC CPU to be connected.
ATTENTION
R200
January 2011
IP is as specified in Ethernet communication module.
The connection to PLC CPU can be tested using ping command from
PC.

Honeywell
249
11. Online
Modem connect
Perform the following steps to connect using the Modem.
Step
Action
On the Online Settings window, select the Connection Type as Modem.
Click Setting to specify modem details.

The field description for Details > Modem window are as follows:
Field
Description
Modem Type
Enter the modem type available to connect. Snet

communication module has exclusive modem
functions.
Port number
Enter the modems communication port.
Baud rate
Enter the modems communication speed.
Phone number
Enter the phone number of the modem if it is a dialup modem.
Station number
Enter the station number specified in the

communication module of Remote Step 1.
RS-232C or USB remote connect

Perform the following steps to connect to RS-232C or USB remotely.
Step
Action
On the Online Settings window, select the Connection Type as RS232C/USB.
Select the Depth as Remote 1.
Click Settings and click the Remote 1 tab to specify Remote 1 settings.
The field description for Details > Remote 1 window are as follows:
Field
250
Description
Network type
Used to specify PLC communication module type for

remote connection, Snet, FEnet, and FDEnet are
available for the communication modules.
Base number
Used to specify communication modules base

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
11. Online
Step
Action
number of local PLC base.
Slot number
Used to specify communication modules slot number

of local PLC base.
Station number
Used to input communication modules specified

station number of Remote 1.
IP address
Used to input communication modules specified IP

address of Remote 1.
Snet channel
Select the connection channel port if the

communication module of Remote.1 connection is
Snet module.
ATTENTION
Only if the network type is FEnet, the IP address is active. If not, IP

address is inactive with the station number active.
Base number of 0~7 and slot number of 0~15 is available.
Remote 2 connect setting
R200
January 2011
a)
Network type: Used to specify PLC communication module type for remote
connection. Snet, FEnet and FDEnet are available for the communication
modules.
b)
Base number: Used to specify communication modules base number of local

PLC base.
Honeywell
251
11. Online
11.2. Online functions
c)
Slot number: Used to specify communication modules slot number of local

PLC base.
d)
Station number: Used to input communication modules specified station

Number of Remote 1.
e)
IP address: Used to input communication modules specified IP address of

Remote 1.
11.2 Online functions

Connect
This option is used to connect to the PLC based on the specified Connect Options.
Perform the following steps to connect to a PLC using a specified connection option.
Step
Action
Click Online > Connect. The Connect window displays.
If connected to the PLC, the Online menu and Online status displays.
If a password has been setup in the PLC, you are prompted to enter the
Password.
Connection is established if the input password matches the PLC password.
ATTENTION
252
If the connection to the PLC is fast, the window may appear and
disappear quickly while connecting.
After the connection has been established, the PLCs status displays
beside the project name on the project window and on the status display
line.
If any other application program is already connected to the PLC, its

main online functions are not available.
After the PLC is connected, connecting its cable to another PLC

disconnects the previous PLC automatically.
When Disconnect is run, Monitor and Debug functions also end.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
11. Online
ATTENTION
1.
Check Points when connection fails.
RS-232C
Check if RS-232C cable connection between Computer and PLC is

correct.
Check if the COM port number of the computer matches with the COM
port number where the cable is connected.
Check if the RS-232C cable connections are correct.
Check if the status of PLC is normal.
2.
USB
Check if the USB cable connection between the Computer and PLC is
correct.
Check if the computer identified the PLC as an USB device during the
connection.
a)
Connect the computer and PLC with an USB cable.
For additional details, refer to Verifying the USB device driver

installation.
ATTENTION
a)
Click Start>Run.
b) Enter command in the Run dialog box.

c) Run ping test for Ethernet module from the Command Prompt. Type
ping <IP address of CPU> and press Enter. If the Ethernet module
responds normally, the window shows the communication status. If
the Ethernet module does not respond, the window displays the Time
out message.
R200
January 2011
Check if the status of PLC is normal.

Honeywell
253
11. Online
Write
It is used to transfer user programs, parameters, and comments to the PLC.
Perform the following steps to transfer user programs, parameters and comment to the
PLC.
Step
Action
To connect to PLC via Online, click Online > Connect.
Click Online > Write.

The Write window displays.
Select the data to transfer to the PLC and then click OK to start transferring
the selected data to PLC.
The field description for Write window are as follows:
Field Label
254
Description
Selection Tree
Selects the data to transfer to PLC.
OK
Click to transfer the data to PLC.
Cancel
Click to cancel writing of data.
a)
Displays the current Write/Read item in progress.
b)
Displays the data size of the item (current items size/ all items size).
c)
Displays progressing rate of the current item.
d)
Displays progressing rate of all items.
e)
Displays progressing time elapsed until current.
f)
Cancel: Stops transferring the data.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
11. Online
ATTENTION
The special module parameter Write is available only when I/O

parameter Write is selected.
Parameter Write takes more time during CPU RUN than in CPU
STOP mode.
Read
It is used to transfer user programs, parameters, and comments from the PLC to a current
project.
Perform the following steps to upload the data in PLC and to apply them to a new
project.
Step
Action
To connect to PLC, click Online > Connect.
Click Online > Read. The Read window displays.
Select items to upload from the PLC and click OK. The uploaded items are
applied to the current project.
A message is displays to confirm that the reading is complete.
ATTENTION
For field descriptions, refer to Write.
Change mode
It is used to convert the operation mode of the PLC in operation.
Perform the following steps to change the PLC operation mode.
Step
Action
To connect to the PLC, click Online > Connect.
Click Online > Change Mode > Run/Stop/Debug.
PLC operation mode changes as selected by the user.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
255
11. Online
ATTENTION
Ensure that PLCs remote dip switch is ON with the operation mode
dip switch as Stop.
The program in the PLC must be same to that in the project to

convert to Debug mode.
If changed from Stop to Run mode, a dialog box confirms the

program conversion to an executable code inside the PLC. This
dialog box may be visible up to 30s according to the program size.
If changed to Run mode, the Performing Initialization Task dialog box

appears while the initialization task is run. After the initialization task
is complete or disconnected, the dialog box closes.
If changed to Run or Debug mode, Run or Debug function may not

be normal if any error occurs on the PLC. Delete the PLC error first
and then change the operation mode.
If Show Message when changing the PLC mode in the Tool >
Option > Online is not selected, the confirmation message is not
displayed when Mode Change instruction is run.
Compare with PLC

This function is used to compare the project in the PLC to the project open in SoftMaster.
Perform the following steps to compare projects.
Step
Action
Click Online > Compare with PLC. The Compare with PLC window
displays.
Select an object to compare and then click Compare.

The field description for Compare with PLC window are as follows:
Field
256
Description
Current project
Refers to the project open in SoftMaster.
Compare
Compares between the selected items.
PLC
Refers to the project in the PLC.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
11. Online
ATTENTION
Compare results displays on the Result window.
For more details, refer to Comparing projects.
Reset PLC
This function is used to reset the PLC. Reset PLC is also possible using the Reset PLC
dip switch in the CPU module.
Perform the following steps to reset the PLC.
Step
Action
Click Online > Reset PLC. The Reset PLC window displays.
Choose to perform a reset or an overall reset and click OK.
ATTENTION
Reset: when PLC is powered again, it deletes all error/warning

information during power ON. Error/warning may occur again based
on the situation.
Overall reset: when PLC is powered again, it clears error/warning

information; latch 1 area data, I/O skip, error mask, and forced I/O
setting area to allow power on.
Beware of the fact that after reset, the PLC is OFF and then ON
again.
Clearing PLC data

It is used to clear user programs, parameters, comments, memory, and latch area in PLC.
To delete the saved data and latch area in PLC, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
To connect to PLC, select Online > Connect.
Select Online > Clear PLC. The Clear PLC window displays.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
257
11. Online
Step
Action
Select items to delete and then click Clear to start Clear PLC.
Under the Clear Item tab, select items of the project saved in the PLC to be
deleted.
Click Clear to delete the selected items.
Select the Clear Memory tab to clear the selected memory area in the PLC.
The field description for Clear PLC window are as follows:
Field
Description
List of memory areas

to select
Shows the memory areas in PLC. Start/End

address to delete can be specified by the user.
Clear
Deletes the selected items.
Select All
Selects all the memory areas.
Reset All
Cancels the selected memory area.
PLC information
You can view the information regarding the connected PLC. You can also set the
password and the PLC timer on the PLC Information window.
CPU information
This function allows checking the detailed information of the PLC CPU.
Perform the following steps to check the detailed information of PLC CPU.
Step
258
Action
Click Online > PLC Information. The PLC Information window displays.
Select the CPU tab. Shows the specified details and status of the connected
PLC CPU.
Click Close to close the window.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
11. Online
CPU performance
SoftMaster enables you to check the scan time of the PLC and memory application
status.
Perform the following steps to check the scan time and memory application status of
PLC.
Step
Action
Select the Performance tab.

The field description for PLC Information > Performance window are as
follows:
Field Label
Description
Scan Time
Shows the Maximum/Minimum/Current scan

time of the connected PLC. If Fixed Cycle
Operation is set in the basic parameter, it
displays the fixed cycle.
Program Memory used
Shows the downloaded programs size/all PLC

program areas size.
Details
Shows the list of programs downloaded on the

PLC.
Upload Memory used
Shows the downloaded comments size/all PLC

comment areas size.
Details
Shows the list of comments saved in the PLC.
Click Details to view details of the Program Memory used. The list of all
saved programs and their size displays.
Password
The user password can be specified, changed or deleted to protect PLC information.
Perform the following steps to assign, change, and delete the user password.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
259
11. Online
Step
Action
Select the Password tab.

The field description for PLC Information > Password window are as follows:
Field
Description
Current Password
Used to enter the password saved

in the PLC.
New password
Used to enter a new password.
Confirm password
Used to enter the New Password

again.
Delete
Deletes the password of the PLC.
Change
Changes the password of the PLC.
Setting password
Perform the following steps to set a new password.
Step
Action
Enter a new password in New Password field.
Enter the new password again in the Confirm password field.
Click Change to set the new password in PLC.
Changing password
Perform the following steps to change an existing password.
Step
260
Action
Enter the password saved in PLC in Current Password field.
Enter a new password in New Password field.
Enter the new password again in Confirm password field.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
11. Online
Step
4
Action
Click Change to change the password of the PLC.
Deleting password
Perform the following steps to delete an existing password.
Step
Action
Enter the password saved in PLC in Current Password field.
Click Clear to delete the PLC password.
ATTENTION
The password can contain a maximum of eight alphabets. The

alphabets can be of upper case or lower case.
Special characters can also be used for password.
On setting a password for the PLC, you are prompted to enter

password when attempting to connect to the PLC. Only after
authentication of the password, the connection to the PLC is
established.
PLC RTC setting

It helps to set the RTC (Real Time Clock) of the PLC.
Perform the following steps to set the RTC of the PLC.
Step
Action
Select the PLC RTC tab.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
261
11. Online
Step
Action
The field description for PLC Information > PLC RTC window are as follows:
Field Label
Description
State
Shows PLC timer setting status. If the timer is

not specified, PLC time is not read.
Date
Displays date.
Time
Displays time.
Synchronize PLC with

PC clock
Synchronizes date and time between PC and

PLC.
Send to PLC
Transfers user-specified time or synchronized

time to PLC.
PLC history
It displays the history data of error/warning, Change Mode and Shut down Log saved in
PLC.
Error log
Perform the following steps to view the error log.
Step
262
Action
Click Online > PLC History. The PLC History window displays.
Select the Error Log tab.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
11. Online
Step
Action
The field description for PLC History > Error Log window are as follows:
Field Label
Description
List
Displays Error Log.
Details/Remedy
Displays details of the error selected from the

history along with action to rectify the error.
Read All
Reads and displays all PLC histories.
Clear all logs
Deletes all logs entered.
Update
Reads PLC history again.
Save
Saves PLC history to a file.
Clear
Deletes PLC history.
Close
Closes the window.
Mode log
It shows the Mode Change Log of PLC operation modes.
Perform the following steps to view the Mode log.
Step
Action
Select the Mode Log tab.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
263
11. Online
Shut down log

It shows the Shut down Log history of PLC.
Perform the following steps to view the Shut down log.
Step
Action
Select the Shut Down Log tab.
ATTENTION
The shut down log also displays the base number where power shut down
occurred.
System log
It shows the history of tasks run by SoftMaster when the PLC is running.
Perform the following steps to view the System log.
Step
Action
Select the System Log tab.
ATTENTION
264
History data is arranged in chronological sequence.
The history is saved as .csv file. This file can be opened in MS Excel
or other String editing programs.
Double-click the first column of the list to change sequence in

ascending/descending order.
A maximum of 100 history data are displayed. Click Read All to read
more PLC histories. If the number of items in history is less than 100,
the Read All is disabled.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
11. Online
PLC error/warning
You can check the error/warning and previous error log currently saved in PLC.
Perform the following steps to check the error/warning and previous error logs in the
PLC.
Step
Action
Click Online > PLC Errors/Warnings. The PLC Error/Warning window

displays.
ATTENTION
In case of an error/warning during connection or Online, the

Error/Warning window displays.
If the error is an I/O parameter issue, I/O installation error, fuse error,
I/O Read/Write error, special communication module error, the
applicable errors slot information displays.
When a Program Error (when the PLC mode is changed from Stop
to Run) or Execution Program Error (when PLC is in Run mode)
occurs, if the SM project and the downloaded PLC program are
same, then double-click the area of program name to move to the
corresponding step in the program.
Flash memory setting

Flash memory operation of PLC can be configured using SoftMaster. When the operation
mode of the PLC mode changes to RUN, it runs the program after copying the program
in the flash memory to the program memory. In other words, it runs the PLC from the
program in the flash memory.
PLC operation in Run mode
PLC operation in RUN mode refers to the operation mode changes from STOP to RUN,
and that the operation mode is Run when PLC is powered ON.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
265
11. Online
Perform the following steps to view or change the flash memory settings.
Step
Action
Click Online > Set Flash Memory. The Flash Memory Run Mode Setup
window displays.
The field description for Flash Memory Run Mode Setup window are as
follows:
Field Label
Description
Enable flash memory run

mode
A program is run from Flash memory.
Disable flash memory run

mode
Cancels the flash memorys operation

mode.
ATTENTION
If a flash memory operation mode is specified, the program is copied

to the flash memory after Program Write or Modification Write during
Run.
The flash memory operation mode setting is configured to recover the

program when PLC status is in error.
Force I/O setting

Force I/O of the I/O refresh area can be specified in PLC.
To specify a forced I/O and I/O refresh area in PLC:
Step
1
Action
Click Online > Force I/O. The Force I/O Setup window displays.
The field description for The Force I/O Setup window are as follows:
266

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
11. Online
Step
Action
Field Label
Description
Module address
Used to select an address by using base,

slot.
Forced Input
Used to enable/disable Forced Input. Forced

input value per bit is applicable only when the
Forced Input is allowed.
Forced Output
Used to enable/disable Forced Output.

Forced output value per bit is applicable only
when the Forced Output is allowed.
Apply
Saves the changed items in the PLC without

closing the window.
Forced I/O
Used to specify the flag and data for each bit.
Setting address list
Displays the address with the Forced I/O flag

or data specified.
Delete
Deletes the flag and data specified in the

selected address from the specified address
list.
Variable Names
Displays the list of variable/comment.
Delete All
Used to cancel the specified flag and data for

all areas.
Select All
Used to specify the flag and data for all

areas.
OK

window.
Cancel
ATTENTION
R200
January 2011
Obtaining Forced I/O information, takes around 5s at a speed of

115200bps with RS-232C connected, or about 1s with USB.
The flag displays the Forced I/O application status for each bit. If you
select the flag, it means Enable, and if you do not select the flag, it
means Disable.
The data displays the forced value. If selected, 1 is the forced value,
Honeywell
267
11. Online
and if not, 0 is the forced value. However, it is effective only when the
flag is in Enable status.
Flag
Data
Forced Value
0 (not selected)
0 (not selected)
0 (not selected)
1 (selected)
1 (selected)
0 (not selected)
1 (selected)
1 (selected)
Click Variable Names to display variables declared on I and Q

Address.
In case of an output module having less than 64-channels, you can

specify the flag and data up to 64 channels.
Force I/O setting

Example: the 4th bit of Base 0, Slot 0 forced to output value 1, 8th bit to output value 0.
Step
268
Action
Select base 0 and slot 0.
Select the flag and data of the bit 3. %QW0.0.0 is registered to the
established Address.
Select the flag of the bit 7. As the forced output value of the bit 7 is 0, no data
needs to be selected. Since %QW0.0.0 is already registered in the pre-set
Address, it is not added again.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
11. Online
Step
Action
Select the Forced Output Enable Flag and then click Apply to apply the
forced value.
Forced I/O cancel

Example: the 4th, 8th bit of Base0, Slot 0 forced value to cancel.
Step
Action
Move to %QW0.0.0. Use the button or directly enter the area to move to.
Click the bit 3 and 7s flag to cancel the forced output value.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
269
11. Online
Step
Action
Click Apply.
ATTENTION
In program monitoring, the following are applicable:
In the case of forced input, monitoring is displayed with the forced

value since the forced input value is updated in the monitor area.
In the case of forced output, monitoring is not displayed since the

forced value is actually the output regardless of the calculation result.
Skip I/O setting

Skip is used to enable or disable IO Slots during the PLC operation.
Perform the following steps to skip I/O during a PLC operation.
Step
1
270
Action
Click Online > Skip I/O. The Skip I/O Setup window displays.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
11. Online
Step
Action
The field description for Skip I/O Setup window are as follows:
Field Label
Description
Base Skip I/O
Used to skip the base I/O. If the base

module is skipped, all slots in the base are
I/O skipped.
Slot Skip I/O
Used to skip a particular IO.
Show Existing Base Only
Shows existing base only
Details
Displays detailed information of the special

module or the communication module.
OK

window.
Cancel
Skip I/O setting for each slot

Perform the following steps to skip I/O setting for each slot.
Step
Action
Select the base with the slot to specify Skip I/O.
Select the slot to specify the Skip I/O.
Select the check box corresponding to the module. Observe that * appears
beside the base.
Click Yes to display the changed values.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
271
11. Online
Skip I/O cancel for each slot

Perform the following steps to cancel skip I/O for a slot.
Step
Action
Select the base to cancel the Skip I/O.
Select the slot to cancel the Skip I/O.
Clear the check box corresponding to the module. Observe that the *mark
beside the base disappears if there is no slot where Skip I/O is specified in
the applicable base.
Base skip I/O setting

Perform the following steps to set base skip I/O.
Step
Action
Select the base to specify the base Skip I/O.
Select the check box corresponding to the module.
Click OK. The changed values displays.
Click Yes to display changed values.
Base skip I/O cancel

Perform the following steps to cancel the base skip I/O.
Step
272
Action
Select the base to cancel the base Skip I/O.
Clear the check box corresponding to the selected module. As the base Skip
I/O is cancelled, the Skip I/O for each slot can be specified or cancelled.
Click OK to apply the specified Skip I/O.
Click Yes to display the changed values.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
11. Online
Fault mask
It is used to configure whether the module must be run in Fault during PLC operation.
Perform the following steps to view fault mask setting.
Step
1
Action
Click Online > Fault Mask. The Fault Mask Setup window displays.
The field description for Fault Mask Setup window are as follows:
Field Label
Description
Base Fault Mask
Used to apply base fault mask. If

the base modules mask is
specified, all slots in the base are
of the fault mask.
Slot Fault Mask
Used to apply the fault mask for

each slot.
Show Existing Base Only
Shows existing base only.
Details
Displays detailed information about

the special module or the
communication module.
OK
Click to save the changes and to

Cancel
ATTENTION
R200
January 2011
Canceling the Fault Mask specified is identical as described in Skip

I/O setting. For more details, refer to Skip I/O setting.

Honeywell
273
11. Online
ATTENTION
274
The I/O Information window which is similar to Fault Mask or I/O skip
window when Online > I/O Information is selected. I/O Sync. is
activated only when the PLC is in STOP Mode.
Click I/O Sync to synchronize the I/O Parameter of SoftMaster

project with the real module installation information. Be careful since
the previous I/O parameter will be erased.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
11. Online
11.3. Module changing wizard
11.3 Module changing wizard

This wizard is used to change the module while the PLC is in RUN mode.
Perform the following steps to change the module during PLC operation.
Step
1
Action
Click Online > Module Changing Wizard. The Selecting Module window
displays.
The field description for Selecting Module window are as follows:
Field Label
Description
Comment
Displays the comment of the module selection

stage.
Base Module Tree
Displays the base module.
Slot Modules List
Displays the information of the slot installed

on the base module.
Back
It is inactive while you select the module.

Used to move to the module selection stage.
Next
It is active only if you select a module to

change. Used to move to the module
confirming stage.
Cancel
Closes the Module Changing Wizard.
Select the module to change and then click Next. The Checking Module
window displays.
The field description for Checking Module window are as follows:
Field Label
R200
January 2011
Description
Comment
Displays the comment of the module

confirming stage.
Module Information
Displays detailed information of the selected

module.
Back
Used to move to the module selection stage.
Next
Used to move to the module removing stage.
Cancel

Honeywell
275
11. Online
Step
Action
Check the module to change.
Click Next, Remove Module window displays if the information displayed is

identical to the module to change. Click Back to go back to the previous
stage or click Cancel to cancel the Module Changing Wizard.
The field description for Removing Module window are as follows:
Field Label
Description
Comment
Displays the comment of the removing

module stage.
Back
Used to move to the confirming stage of the

module removal.
Next
Used to move to the module installation

stage.
Cancel
Remove the module physically.
After removing the module, click Next, the Changing Module Finished
window displays. Click Back to move back to the previous stage or click
Cancel to cancel the Module Changing Wizard.
Install the module at the module installation stage.

The field description for Changing Module Finished window are as follows:
Field Label
276
Description
Description
Displays the comment of the module change

complete stage.
Back
It is inactive since going back to previous stage is

unavailable after the module changed.
Finish
Finishes the Module Changing Wizard.
After inserting the module, click Next. Click Back to move back to the
previous stage or click Cancel to cancel the Module Changing Wizard.
Close the Module Changing Wizard.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
11. Online
ATTENTION
During Module removal using the wizard, if the module is not

removed, an error message appears.
During Module installation using the wizard, if the module is not

installed, an error message appears.
ATTENTION
If the Module Changing Wizard is cancelled, Fault Mask and Skip I/O
may continue to be active. Activate the Fault mask and Skip I/O to
operate the module again.
ATTENTION
To change the module without using the wizard, perform the following steps:
1.
Set the Skip I/O for the module to change.
2.
Set the Fault Mask for the module to change.
3.
Remove the module from the PLC.
4.
Install a new module.
5.
Release the Skip I/O for the applicable module.
6.
Click Online > PLC Error/Warning to check for any error on the
applicable module.
7.
If no error is found on the applicable module, release the Fault Mask for
the module.
For additional information on Skip I/O and Fault Mask specified for the
module, refer to Skip I/O setting and Fault mask.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
277
11. Online
278

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.1 Monitoring
SoftMasters monitoring functions include: Start/Stop Monitoring, Pause, Resume,
Pausing Conditions, and Change Current Value.
Start/stop monitoring
Perform the following steps to start/stop monitoring.
Step
Action
Click Online > Connect for on-line connection to PLC.
Click Monitor > Start Monitoring to start monitoring. Click Monitor > Stop
Monitoring to stop monitoring.
If LD or IL program is active, it goes to monitoring mode.
ATTENTION
When monitoring starts, correct value may not be monitored, if PLC program
and SoftMaster program are different.
Change current value

Selected addresss current value or forced I/O setting can be changed during monitoring.
Perform the following steps to change current value for a selected address.
Step
Action
Click Monitor > Start Monitoring to start monitoring.
Select address or variable on the program or variable monitoring window.
Click Monitor > Change Current Value. The Change Current Value
window displays.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
279
12. Monitoring
12.1. Monitoring
Step
Action
The field description for Change Current Value window are as follows:
Field Label
280
Description
Address
Name of the variable where current value is

changed.
Type
Type of the variable where current value is

changed.
Range
Available range of current value based on type.
Value On/Off
Device On/Off specified if its type is BOOL.
Value
Variable value specified if its type is not BOOL.
Forced I/O
Forced I/O setting available if variable is I/Q area

and BOOL type.
Flag
It is used for Forced I/O setting.
OK
It is used to transfer setting value to PLC.
Data
Forced I/O data value is specified.
Enter Current Value in the window and click OK to change the current value.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.1. Monitoring
Step
Action
ATTENTION
1.
The default value is displayed based on the variables display type. In

other words, if it is displayed in hexadecimal when monitored, current
value changes to hexadecimal.
2.
The value may not be entered according to its display type. In other
words, if displayed in hexadecimal, it can be entered as unsigned
decimal.
3.
When you click OK, an error may occur due to ineffective input value or
range exceedance.
4.
Hexadecimal input starts with 16# shown in 16#1234.
5.
As for string type, current value (String) is entered between single

quotation marks (abcde).
6.
In case of WSTRING type, enter the current value (string) between

double quotation marks (abcde).
7.
Only if variable is I/Q address and BOOL type, compulsory I/O is active.
8.
If forced I/O is inactive, edit feature of current value and ON/OFF setting
is inactive.
9.
Change Current Value and Forced I/O Setting are not run at a time.
For additional information, refer to Force I/O setting.
Pause/restart monitoring
You can pause and restart monitoring.
Pause monitoring
Perform the following steps to pause monitoring.
Step
Action
Click Monitor > Start Monitoring to start monitoring.
Click Monitor > Pause to stop monitoring momentarily.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
281
12. Monitoring
12.1. Monitoring
Restart monitoring
Perform the following steps to restart monitoring.
Select Monitor > Resume to restart monitoring.

ATTENTION
PLC is in RUN mode, even if monitoring is momentarily stopped.
You can only restart paused monitoring.
Monitoring value is not renewed if the program window is moved with

Pause Monitoring.
If the current value is changed with Pause Monitoring, the PLC value
changes but monitoring value of program window is not renewed.
Pausing conditions
If a specified address meets the set conditions, monitoring is paused.
Perform the following steps to set the pausing conditions.
Step
282
Action
Click Monitor > Pausing Conditions. The Pausing Conditions window

displays.
Specify address on Pausing Conditions window.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.1. Monitoring
Step
Action
The field descriptions for Pausing Conditions window are as follows:
Field Label
R200
January 2011
Description
Select All
Used to check all items with no error to allow on

the list.
Use
Used to check setting status of Pause

Monitoring.
Program
Selects a program name.
Reset All
Used to cancel all the selected items allowed.
Variable
Used to enter variable name to stop monitoring

momentarily.
Condition
Used to select conditions to stop monitoring

momentarily.
Set value
Used to enter condition value to stop monitoring

momentarily.
Type
Displays a variable type.
Comment
Used to display description declared in variable.
Find
Used to find the variable to stop monitoring

momentarily on variable list of a selected
program.
OK
Click to save details and to close the window.
Cancel
Click to close window without saving the details.
Click OK to save details.

Honeywell
283
12. Monitoring
12.2. LD program monitoring
ATTENTION
A maximum of ten conditions can be set to pause monitoring.
When you click OK, the items in error are not saved.
Errors are displayed in pink.
String type does not support the function of pause monitoring.
Among the five conditions [==, >, <, >=, <=] available for pause
monitoring, you can select one.
12.2 LD program monitoring

When the SoftMaster is in monitoring mode, it displays contact points prepared in the
Ladder program (normally open contact point, normally closed contact point, positive
transition pulse contact point, negative transition pulse contact point), coils (coil, reversecoil, set coil, reset coil, positive transition pulse coil, negative transition pulse coil) and
function (block) I/O parameters current value.
Perform the following steps to start monitoring.
Step
Action
Click Monitor > Start/Stop Monitoring.
LD program changes to monitoring mode.
Click Monitor > Change Current Value to change current value.
Monitor display of contact point

1.
Normally open contact point: If an applicable contact points value is on status,

address (or variable) value displays in red, and the power flow inside the contact
point in blue.
ATTENTION
Monitor-related colors indicated in this users guide are the default colors of
SoftMaster. Applicable colors may be changed using Tools > Options. For
more details on the option item, refer to Basic application.
284

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.3. Variable monitoring
2.
Normally closed contact point: If applicable contact points value is on status,

address value is displays in red, and the power flow inside the contact point is not
displayed.
3.
Normally transition pulse contact point: displayed similar to as normally open

contact point.
4.
Normally transition pulse contact point: displayed similar to as normally closed

contact point.
Coil monitor display

1.
Coil: If applicable coils value is On status, address (or variable) value displays in
red, and the power flow inside the coil in blue.
2.
Reverse-coil: If applicable coils value is On status, address (or variable) value is

displays in red, and the power flow inside the coil is not displayed.
3.
Set coil: displays as similar to coil.
4.
Reset coil: displays as similar to (negative) coil.
5.
Positive transition pulse coil: displays as similar to coil.
6.
Negative transition pulse coil: displays as similar to coil.
Monitor display of function (block)

Monitoring value is displayed on the IO parameter of the function (block). The data of
the function (block) IO parameter is displayed based on the monitoring display format.
ATTENTION
Data display can be customized using Tools > Options > Online. For
details, refer to Basic application.
Stop monitoring
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
285
12. Monitoring
ATTENTION
When monitoring, all types of Edit is unavailable except Modification

during Run Mode.
When monitoring starts and stops, LD diagram height changes to

display application instructions current value, which takes some time
according to the size of prepared program.
12.3 Variable monitoring

Monitoring is available through specific registered variables.
The field descriptions of Variable Monitoring Window are as follows:
Field Label
286
Description
PLC
Used to display PLC available for registration. A SoftMaster project is

composed of multi-PLC. Accordingly, it is displayed on the variable
monitoring window.
Program
Used to select a program name with a variable to register.
Variable Name/
Address
Used to enter the name of a variable or address.
Value
Used to display applicable address value when monitored. The value

can be changed through Change Current Value of monitoring.
Type
Displays the type of variable.
Address/Variable
Name
Press Enter or double-click an assigned address or variable name to

select a variable on the list of local variables if memory is allocated.
Comment
Displays the variable comment.
Error Display
Error displays in red.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
Field Label
Error Type
Description
Error type:
In case one of PLC name, address and type is not entered.
In case of incorrect address.
In case there is no program name or there is no program in the

PLC.
In case the address type is not supported or PLC name

unavailable.
ATTENTION
The areas of type, address/variable and comment column cannot be

edited by user.
You cannot monitor four variable monitoring tabs at the same time.
The number of addresses available to register in variable monitoring is

unlimited.
Only the part displayed on the window is monitored.
The larger the number of addresses, the longer the monitoring refresh
takes.
Even if not in monitoring mode, refresh is available on variable

monitoring window.
Registering variable/comment
Monitoring items can be registered on local variable list on the variable monitoring
window.
Perform the following steps to register in variable/comment.
Step
Action
On the monitoring window, right-click and select Register in

Variable/Comment from the context menu.
The Select dialog box appears, if two or more PLCs are included in the
project or if two or more programs are included in a PLC. Select the PLC and
program to register.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
287
12. Monitoring
Step
3
Action
Click OK. The Select Variable window displays.
The field description of Select Variable window are as follows:
Field Label
Description
Variable
Used to enter variable names to find.
Variable type
Displays variables by types.
Variable List
Used to display the list of variables.
OK
Used to register selected items on the varia

monitoring window.
ATTENTION
You can select one or more items on Select Variable/Address window.
The selected item is added in the last line of the variable monitoring
window.
An item same as a previously registered item can be also registered.
Register all
You can register all direct variables at the same time.
Perform the following steps to register all variables.
288
Step
Action
On the variable monitoring window, right-click the mouse and select Register
All from the context menu.
The Select dialog box appears, if two or more PLCs are included in the
project. Select a PLC and program to register.
Click OK. The Register All window displays.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
The field description for Register All window are as follows:
Field label
Description
Start Address
Used to input start address of the address to

register. (Address Ex: IX0.0.0, QB1.2.0.
MW12)
Count
Used to enter the number of registers.
The variable registration screen displays.
ATTENTION
A maximum of 100 variables can be registered at a time.
The item to register is added at the last line of the variable monitoring
window.
Register by user
The user can directly enter items to register on the variable monitoring window. You can
directly edit the PLC, Program, and Variable/Address Column.
ATTENTION
Copy, Paste, Cut, and Delete functions are provided.
Copy: available in String format on the variable monitoring windows.

Paste is available for Excel and other String editors.
Paste: Paste is available for variable monitoring after Copy from Excel or
other String editors.
Delete: used to delete the selected row. Delete is also applicable for
several selected rows.
Undo or Redo functions are not supported.
Drag and drop register from other windows

The user can select contact point, coil, variable, and so on from other windows (LD,
Variable/Comment window) to drag and drop on the variable monitoring window for
registering.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
289
12. Monitoring
Perform the following steps to drag and drop area to register from other windows.
Step
Action
Select the area from other windows (LD, SFC, Variable/Comment window) to
register on the variable monitoring.
Area to register onto the variable monitoring from LD window Red Edge.
Area to register onto the variable monitor from SFC window.
Area to register onto the variable monitoring window from Variable/Comment

window.
Move to the variable monitoring window, press and hold the mouses left
button on the selected area.
Cursor shape and input image is created onto the variable monitoring
window as shown in the following figure.
290
Release the mouse button after positioning on the row of the variable
monitoring window to insert the selected items.
Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
Step
4
Action
The selected items are registered on the variable monitoring window as
shown in the following figure.
ATTENTION
The variable registering time is directly proportional to the number of

variables to be registered.
There is no limit on the number of variables that can be registered.
Items inserted in the middle of rows, are registered between rows.
Press and hold mouses left button and move onto variable monitoring
number tabs (Monitoring 1, Monitoring 2, Monitoring 3, and Monitoring 4)
to register on the applicable variable monitoring tabs.
View detailed/briefly
This function enables to view as many variables as possible on the variable monitoring
window.
Perform the following steps to view detailed/briefly.
Step
1
Action
On the variable monitoring window, right-click and select Briefly. The
following window displays.
Only the columns of variable/address and value displays.

2
R200
January 2011
Select Detailed to display the following window containing many rows.

Honeywell
291
12. Monitoring
ATTENTION
Selecting Briefly hides the PLC, Program, Type, Address/Variable, and

Comment columns.
Even when in Brief View mode, the hidden columns can be viewed
through View function.
The number of rows is decided by the size of the variable monitoring

window.
In Brief View mode, the number of rows change if the size of the Variable
Monitoring Window changes.
Even if in Brief View mode, Register, Delete and Edit functions are all
available. However, Undo and Redo functions are not supported.
Tool tips display PLC, Type and Address only. However, the variable if
declared also displays.
View options
The user can select specific columns.
Perform the following steps to view a selected function.
Step
292
Action
On the variable monitoring window, right-click and select View Option >
Column Name (PLC, Program, Variable/Address, Value,
Address/Variable, Comment) from the context menu.
To hide the selected column, right-click and select the same menu again.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
ATTENTION
By default, all view option columns are displayed.
This function is also available in Detailed View mode.
The value column does not support Hide function.
If converted to Detailed or Brief View mode, hidden columns are

displayed by default.
String in the hidden columns cannot be copied and pasted in other

editors.
Display
The display of the monitoring value of the address registered on the variable monitoring
can be changed.
Perform the following steps to change the display type of an address.
Step
Action
On the variable monitoring window, right-click and select Unsigned Decimal,

Signed Decimal, Hexadecimal, and String.
The display type of the selected address changes.
ATTENTION
R200
January 2011
BOOL type if viewed in unsigned decimal is displayed as On/Off.
Hexadecimal is displayed with small letter prefix 16# as shown in

16#h10AC.
String is displayed in , for example, adcd.
Can set different type than defined in the monitoring option for LD.
Display menus are active or inactive based on available display type.

Honeywell
293
12. Monitoring
Monitoring operations
Start monitoring
It is used to begin monitoring of the registered addresses on the variable monitoring
window.
Step
Action
Displays item with identical Start Monitoring PLC name and the item with no
error execute Monitoring.
Variable Monitoring Window In monitoring mode.
ATTENTION
PLCs address value is not displayed, if not monitored.
Any item with error is not monitored.
Edit, Add, and Delete are available even during monitoring.

Current value of the address can be changed in the monitoring mode.
Perform the following steps to change the current value of the address in monitoring
mode.
Step
294
Action
Select Address.
Click Monitor > Change Current Value. Double-click the address selected
Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
on the variable monitoring window or press Enter.
The Change Current Value window displays, enabling you to directly enter
the current value.
Click OK to transfer the setting value to the PLC.
Find
Find
It is used to find a string based on the classification by capital/small letter.
ATTENTION
Find and Replace function is not available on the variable monitoring

window.
Value is regarded as a string not as a figure when Find function is run in

the value column.
Find again
It is used to find the string found before once again. Initiate the Find command on the
program or Variable/Comment, and then initiate Find Again on the variable monitoring
to start find.
Print
It prints the current active variable monitoring tab contents.
ATTENTION
Hidden columns are not printed.
Print Preview function is not available.
Alignment
Alignment can be changed to ascending or descending sequence.
Perform the following steps to change the alignment.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
295
12. Monitoring
12.4. System monitoring
Step
Action
Double-click on the header of the column to align.
Alignment changes to ascending or descending sequence.
After alignment, an arrow figure indicates the sequence as ascending or

descending.
ATTENTION
If aligned in descending sequence, a downward arrow displays. An

upward arrow indicates the ascending sequence.
By default, it is not aligned when the project is opened.
If aligned once more in descending sequence, it is aligned in ascending

sequence.
Alignment for row is not available.
12.4 System monitoring

System Monitoring is used to display the PLCs slot information, assigned I/O
information, module status, and data value.
Basic application
System Monitoring can be initiated in the following two ways:
296
Click Monitor > System Monitoring.
Click Start > Program >SoftMaster > System Monitoring.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
The Module Information window displays the information of the PLC slot. After reading
the module information saved in the PLC, it displays it on the data display screen of the
module information window.
Select one of the following options view the Base.
Step
Action
Select items on the module information window (Example: Base 0, Base 1)
Select Base items (First, Previous, Next, and Last)
Use the direction key on the keyboard to position the modules cursor on the
base to select.
ATTENTION
To start System Monitoring, the SoftMaster must be Online with the PLC and
the Monitoring must be ON.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
297
12. Monitoring
Connect/disconnect
System Monitoring is initiated from SoftMaster, it can also be initiated independently.
Thus, the connection is available to PLC with Connect options. If connected with PLC,
base information is read from PLC to display on the module information window.
Perform the following steps to connect/disconnect system monitoring to PLC.
Step
Action
Specify Connect options.
Confirm that the cable is installed as applicable to the connection method.
Click PLC > Connect to connect.
Click PLC > Disconnect to disconnect.
ATTENTION
System Monitoring when initiated connects to the saved Connect

options.
If run in SoftMaster, it connects to SoftMasters Connect options.
Default of Base 0 displays on the screen.
System synchronization
It reads base information, I/O assignment method, and slot information specified in the
PLC to display on the window. When monitored, it reads I/O skip information and forced
I/O input/output information to change the current value.
Perform the following steps for system synchronization.
Step
Action
Confirm the connection status with PLC.
Click PLC > System Synchronization.
ATTENTION
298
Executing system synchronization updates only the module information.
For details on I/O assignment method, refer to Basic parameter.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
All I/O modules ON/OFF

It is used to check output value of all the I/O modules on the PLC.
All I/O modules ON
It turns the data value of all the I/O modules on the PLC as ON.
Perform the following steps to turn ON the data modules.
Step
Action
Click PLC > All I/O modules ON.
All I/O modules OFF

It makes the data value of all the I/O modules on the PLC as OFF.
Perform the following steps to turn OFF all I/O modules.
Step
Action
Click PLC > All I/O modules OFF.
Selected I/O modules ON/OFF

It is used to check the output value of the selected I/O modules on the PLC.
Selected I/O module ON
All I/Os selected are forced to ON.
Perform the following steps to turn ON a selected I/O module.
Step
Action
Click PLC > Selected I/O modules ON.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
299
12. Monitoring
Selected I/O module OFF

All I/Os selected are forced to OFF.
Perform the following steps to turn OFF a selected I/O module.
Step
Action
Click PLC > Selected I/O modules OFF.

To change the current value, the SoftMaster must be connected to the PLC and be in the
monitoring mode. Click the contact point to change the data value of the selected contact
point to ON or OFF.
Perform the following steps to change the current value of a selected contact point.
Step
Action
Ensure that the PLC is online and the monitoring mode is enabled.
Position the mouse cursor on the I/O modules contact point to change the
cursor to hand shape.
Click the I/O modules contact point.
ATTENTION
Move the mouse to the I/O contact point to display the assigned address
on the status bar (located on the bottom-right of the window).
If I/O skip is specified, it is always displays as OFF.
Information display of power module

Information of Power Module displays base power shutdown history including date,
time, and details in which power shutdown bases are displayed.
300

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
Perform the following steps to display the information of a power module.

Step
Action
Select one of the following methods to display module information:

Select the Power Module and select PLC > Module Info.
Select the Power Module and right-click and select Module Info. from the
context menu.
Select the Power Module on the window and press Enter.

Select and double-click on the Power Module displayed on the window.
The Power Down History Information window displays.
ATTENTION
A maximum of 100 power shutdowns displays on the window.
No module information is available for empty slots and I/O modules.
Information display of CPU module

CPU Module Information displays the CPU version, type, operation mode, key status,
CPU status, connection status, mode conversion source, forced I/O setting status, I/O
skip, and fault mask status.
Perform the following steps to display the information of a CPU module.
Step
Action
Select one of the following methods to display the CPU module information.
Select the CPU Module and select PLC > Module Info.
Select the CPU Module on the Module Information window, and right-click
and select CPU Module Info. from the context menu.
Select the CPU Module on the window and press Enter.

Select and double-click on the CPU Module displayed on the window.
The CPU Module Information window displays.

R200
January 2011

Honeywell
301
12. Monitoring
Information display of communication module

Communication Module Information displays module type, operation mode, hardware
error and hardware version, O/S version and its installed date.
Perform the following steps to display the information of a communication module.
Step
Action
Select one of the following methods to display the COM module information.
Select Communication Module and select PLC > Module Info.
Select Communication Module on the Module Information window, right-
click and select Connection Module Info. from the context menu.
Select Communication Module on the window and press Enter.

Select and double-click on Communication Module displayed on the
window.
The Communication Module Information window displays.
Viewing information of special modules

Special Module Information displays the module name, O/S version and date and module
status.
Perform the following steps to display the information of a special module.
Step
Action
Select one of the following methods to display special module information:

Select the Special Module and select PLC > Module Information.
Select a Special Module on the Module Information window and right-click
and select Special Module Info. from the context menu.
Select a Special Module on the screen and press Enter.

Double-click a Special Module displayed on the screen.
The Special Module Information window displays.
302

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
Classification
Description
Module name
Provides special modules type and its

detailed information.
O/S version
Provides special modules installed O/S

version information, which is used for
upgrading module O/S later.
O/S date
Provides special modules latest O/S

updated date information.
Module status
Provides special modules current status

(error code) information.
It reads PLCs I/O data to display on the window.
Start monitoring
Step
Action
Click PLC > Start Monitoring.
Stop monitoring
Perform the following steps to stop monitoring.
Step
Action
Click PLC > Stop Monitoring.
Special module monitoring

It initiates monitoring the special module (A/D module, D/A module, HS counter
module).
Perform the following steps to run special module monitoring.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
303
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
Click PLC > Special Module Monitoring. The Special Module Monitor
window displays.
ATTENTION
Positioning module does not support PLC's module monitoring.
Positioning modules monitoring function is installed along with its

exclusive software to monitor.
Save
It is used to save the system information and data currently displayed on the window.
Perform the following steps to save the data and system information:
Step
Action
Click File > Save.
Click File > Save As to save the data in a different file name.
ATTENTION
File extension is set as (.smi).
Open
It is used to read the system information file previously saved.
To open a file:
304
Disconnect from PLC.
Click File > Open.
Double-click an applicable file name.
Drag and drop the file onto the System Monitoring to open it.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.5. Address monitoring
Navigate base
It selects a base to show its module information.
Perform the following steps to navigate to the first, previous, next, and last base.
Step
1
Action
Navigate to the first base:
On the menu, click Base > First Base.
Navigate to the previous base:

On the menu, click Base > Previous Base.
Navigate to the next base:

On the menu, click Base > Next Base.
Navigate to the last base:

On the menu, click Base > Last Base.
Print preview
This function is used to see a print preview of system monitoring.
On the Preview window, the user can modify the area to be printed.
Perform the following steps for a preview before printing.
Step
Action
On the menu, click PLC > Disconnect.
On the System Monitoring window, click File > Preview.
Modify the area of the image displayed.
Move the mouse to the edge.
Move the mouse while being clicked to modify the size.
ATTENTION
R200
January 2011
The specified area of Preview is saved.
In monitoring mode, Preview is not available.

Honeywell
305
12. Monitoring
12.5 Address monitoring

Address Monitoring enables the monitoring of all the address areas data in the PLC.
It can write or read data value on the PLCs specific address. In addition, Address
Monitoring can display the data value continuously when displayed or entered on the
window depending on the bit format and display method.
Basic application
Address Monitoring is performed by the following two ways:
On the SoftMaster menu, click Monitor > Address Monitoring.
On the Start menu, click Program > SoftMaster > Address Monitoring.
The address information window displays all the address areas in the PLC, based on CPU
type.
Double-click the address icon (Example: I. Q, M, R, W) or right-click on the Address
Tree window and choose Open Address from the context menu.
306

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
ATTENTION
To start address monitoring, SoftMaster must be Online with PLC and

the monitoring must be ON.
If monitoring mode is OFF, the address displays the previous data value.
The data value is initialized to 0.
Address areas
Address areas are necessary for effective and correct control of various types of data.
PLC provides various address areas of data to manage the data effectively.
For additional information on the respective detailed address area, refer to
2MLI CPUU Users Guide.
Data format and display items

Data is displayed on the window in the following ways:
Display Setting
Description
Data Size
1 bit, 8 bits, 16 bits, 32 bits, and 64 bits
Display Format
Binary, BCD, Unsigned decimal, Signed

decimal, Hexadecimal, Real, String
1 bit, 8 bit, 16 bit, 32 bit, and 64 bit

Data size of the address is displayed in 1 bit, 8 bit, 16 bit, 32 bit, or 64 bit
To display the data size of the address in 1 bit, 8 bit, 16 bit, 32 bit, or 64 bit:
Click View > View Options >1 bit/8 bit/16 bit/32 bit/64 bit from the menu of the
Address Monitoring window.
ATTENTION
The address of a selected cell is displayed in the task bar.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
307
12. Monitoring
Binary, BCD, unsigned decimal, signed decimal, hexadecimal, real, and text
Address data can also be displayed in binary, BCD, unsigned decimal, signed decimal,
hexadecimal, real, and text format by choosing the appropriate View option.
Edit data
Data value is specified to write address data on the PLC, or to write the selected area on
the PLC.
Edit cell
It is used to edit data in the cell.
Perform the following steps to edit data in the cell:
Step
Action
Use the mouse or keyboard to select an optional cell.
If in monitoring mode, data can be directly entered in the selected cell. If

monitoring is off, double-click the bottom right of the cell to open a dialog box
to enter the data.
Cut, copy, paste, delete data

You can Cut, Copy, Paste, and delete data from the cell. This works like the standard
windows functions.
Fill
It is used to fill the selected data.
Perform the following steps to fill a selected area.
Step
308
Action
Use the mouse to select the cell area to fill automatically.
Position the mouse at the end of the cell to make the mouse cursor shape as
+.
Move the mouse with its left button pressed up/down and right/left.
Release the left button of the mouse.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
Save address
Use one of the following three methods to save the address.
Save all address areas
To save all address areas:
Step
Action
Click File > Save.
Click File > Save As to save the data with a different file name.
File extension is set as (.mem).
Save respective address area

To save a respective address area:
Step
1
Action
Click File > Export Address to File.
File extension is set as (address+m). (Example: iim, iqm, imm,)
Save respective address area with all windows closed

To save a respective address area in case if all windows are closed.
Step
Action
Click File > Export Address to File.
Select the address to save from the list.

File extension is set as (i+device+m). (Example: iim, iqm, imm,)
Open address
Use one of the following three methods available to open an address.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
309
12. Monitoring
Open all address areas

To open all address areas:
Select File > Open.
Import address from file

To import an address from file:
Click File > Import Address from File.
Open respective address area with all windows closed

To open a respective address area in case of all windows closed:
Click File > Import Address from File. Select the address to open from the list.
ATTENTION
When in monitoring mode, Open and Import Address from File are inactive.
Data value setting

Data value of the address is specified according to its display type and the number of bits.
In addition, you can select setting area of the data value.
Perform the following steps to set the data value:
Stop monitoring.
Select Edit > Fill Data Area. The Fill Data Area window displays.
The field descriptions for Fill Data Area window are as follows:
Field Label
310
Description
Title bar
Used to display the address to set its data value.
Data value
Used to enter and display the data compatible with the

number of bits and the display format.
Bit value
Used to decide the size of data.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
Field Label
Description
Setup area
Used to decide the range of the data value applied to in

the address.
Display
Used to decide the input format of data and change

format of the data value accordingly if any data value is
available.
ATTENTION
Address name is displayed on the title to display Setting Data Value.
Clear data
It is used to delete all data values of the address.
Perform the following steps to delete all the data values of an address.
Step
Action
Click Edit > Clear Data.
You are prompted to confirm the deletion of all address areas.
Write to PLC
It is used to transfer the address data saved in online computer to PLC.
Perform the following steps to write a saved address data to PLC.
Step
Action
Ensure PLC is connected and the monitoring mode is inactive.
Click PLC > Write to PLC. The Write to PLC window displays.
Select the address to write on Write of PLC window.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
311
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
The field descriptions for Write to PLC window are as follows:
Field Label
Description
Address Area
Used to display the list of the addresses to

write on PLC.
Select All
Used to select all the addresses in the

address area.
Unselect All
Used to cancel all the addresses selected

in the address area.
Click OK to write the selected address on the PLC.
ATTENTION
F addresss exclusive Read areas cannot be written on PLC. Exclusive read
areas are based on the type of CPU.
Read from PLC

It is used to read the address data saved in PLC to online computer.
Perform the following steps to read a saved address data from PLC.
Step
Action
Ensure PLC is connected and is in the monitoring mode.
Click PLC > Read from PLC. The Read from PLC window displays.
Select the address to read from Read from PLC window.

The field descriptions for Read from PLC window are as follows:
Field Label
312
Description
Address Area
Used to display the list of the

addresses to read from PLC.
Select All
Used to select all the addresses in

the address area.
Unselect All
Used to cancel all the addresses

selected in the address area.
Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
Step
4
Action
Click OK to read the selected address from the PLC.
Write selected area on PLC

It is used to write the address data in the selected area on PLC connected.
Perform the following steps to write the address data of a selected area to PLC.
Step
Action
Select the area to write on PLC.
Click PLC > Write Selected Area to PLC.
A confirmation message displays. You are prompted to confirm if you want to

write the selected area on the PLC.
Click Yes to write the selected area on PLC.
It reads the address data from PLC to display on the window in the online status, or it
stops reading the data.
Start monitoring
It reads the address data from PLC to display on the window in the online status.
Step
Action
Click PLC > Start Monitoring.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
313
12. Monitoring
Stop monitoring
It stops reading the address data from PLC in the on-line status.
Perform the following steps to stop monitoring.
Step
Action
Click PLC > Stop Monitoring.
ATTENTION
If in monitoring mode, the data cannot be edited.
If in monitoring mode, Write to PLC, Read from PLC, Write Selected

Area to PLC are not available.

It is used to change the data value of the cell in monitoring mode.
Perform the following steps to change the data value of a cell in monitoring mode.
Step
Action
Ensure PLC is connected and the monitoring mode is active.
Click PLC > Change Current Value. The Change Current Value window
displays.
The field descriptions for Change Current Value window are as follows:
Field Label
Address
Used to display the start address to change the

current value.
Bit number
Used to display the number of bits to change the

current value.
Display
314
Description
Usually it is identical to 1, 8, 16, 32 or 64

bits as displayed on the window.
String format is displayed in 328 bits.
Used to display the data display format to change

the current value.
Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
Set Value
Used to display the data value to change the current

value.
ATTENTION
If the current value is changed in string display format, the data value of 32byte area is always changed from the start address.
PLC type settings

It is used to display the PLC type currently set or to set address data based on the PLC
type.
To view or change the PLC type settings:
Select File > PLC Type Settings. The PLC Type Setting window displays.
The field descriptions for PLC Type Setting window are as follows:
Field Label
Description
PLC Type
Used to display or change the PLC type

currently set.
CPU Type
Displays the currently set CPU type or

changes the CPU type.
ATTENTION
While connected to the PLC, the current PLC type displays but is not
changeable.
Screen zoom-in/zoom-out
It is used to zoom in or out the size of the screen displayed.
To zoom-in, click View > Zoom-In.
To zoom-out, click View > Zoom-Out.
Automatic width/height adjustment

This function is used to adjust the size of the data values to display on the window.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
315
12. Monitoring
Width AutoFit adjusts the size to the string length of the cell. Automatic Height
Adjustment adjusts the row height to the string height of the cell.
To auto-fit width adjustment, click View > Width Auto-Fit.
To auto-fit height adjustment, click View > Height Auto-Fit.
View properties
It is used to change the font and font size of the data value displayed on the window. In
addition, the color of the data value can be changed in the monitoring mode.
Perform the following steps to view the properties of data value.
Step
Action
Click View > View Properties. The View Setting window displays.
Select Font to change font.
Select Color to change color.

The field descriptions for View Setting window are as follows:
Field Label
Description
Font Type, Font size
Shows currently displayed font name and font

size.
Font
Invokes a dialog box to change font name

and font size displayed on the window.
Data value color
Displays color of data value currently

specified in monitoring mode.
Color
Invokes a dialog box to change color of data

value in monitoring mode.
Click OK to apply the newly specified value.
Page setting
It is used to specify the address page printed. Page margins, title, and grid lines can be
shown or hidden as necessary. In addition, the sequence of pages to print can be specified
with priority of row or column.
Perform the following steps to view or change the page settings.
316

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.6. Special module monitoring
Step
Action
Select File > Page Setup. The Page Setup window displays.
Specify margins.
Show or hide title and grid lines as necessary.
Specify the sequence of pages to print with priority of row or column.
Specify the print type of the center of page, horizontal or vertical.
12.6 Special module monitoring

Step
Action
Click Monitor > Special Module Monitoring. The Special Module List
window displays. It displays the list of special module currently installed on
the PLC system.
Select a module on the list and click Monitor. The Special Module
Monitoring window displays.
The field descriptions for Special Module Monitoring window are as follows:
Field Label
R200
January 2011
Description
FLAG Monitor (applicable

only to HS counter
module)
Flag monitoring function is used to run

instructions for HS counter module. The
user can check the instruction and enter
signal status along with HS counter
monitoring/test window as well as Flag
monitoring window displays at the same
time.
Parameter Setting Screen
Parameter setting window is divided into

parameter changing area (setting value) and
confirming area (current value), the changed
parameter is successfully transferred to the
module during monitoring.
Start Monitoring
Click Start Monitoring to start monitoring.

Click Stop Monitoring to stop monitoring.
Test
After changing the parameter in

Monitoring/Test window, click Test Start to
begin testing the operation of applicable
special module, which directly transfers the
Honeywell
317
12. Monitoring
12.7. Trend monitoring
Step
Action
parameter information to the module so to
display its result on the monitoring window
for the user to confirm.
Contact Point Input Signal

Status Screen
The user can confirm HS counter status of

input contact point signal (ON/OFF) through
the Flag monitoring window.
Instruction Screen
The user can initiate the instruction for HS

counter operation and additional functions at
the Flag monitoring window. If the instruction
is correctly run, the status of the applicable
instruction displays as ON/OFF.
Through the Monitoring/Test window, the user can directly change the
parameter value saved in the special module while checking the test
operation and its status of the applicable module.
ATTENTION
Select the HS counter module on the special module window to write HS
counter Flag monitoring and instruction functions.
12.7 Trend monitoring

Trend monitoring is used to read the data periodically from the PLC connected to display
in a graphical format. The trend monitoring window is composed of bit graph and trend
graph. In the bit graph, bit addresss On/Off status displays in stair-shaped graph. In trend
graph, the variation trend of the data displays with the address value converted from
word to data format specified.
Configuring trend monitoring
To configure trend monitoring,
318
Step
Action
Click Monitoring>Trend Monitoring. Select Graph > Trend Settings. The

Trend Setup window displays.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
Step
2
Action
The field descriptions for Trend Setup window are as follows:
Field Label
Description
Frequency
Used to specify the cycle to read data from

PLC. The shorter the cycle, the more correct
the data is, which may have an influence on
PLC scan and PC performance.
Address Setting
Used to assign the address to monitor. The

address displays in bit or in real as specified.
OK

window.
Cancel
Click to closes the window.
ATTENTION
R200
January 2011
The maximum samples to display cannot be greater than the maximum

sample to keep.
The maximum time to display cannot be greater than the maximum time
to keep.
The relationship between the maximum samples to keep and the

maximum sample to display is as shown in the following figure. In the
following figure, graph is of the current graph area displayed on the
screen, which can be scrolled horizontally as many as the maximum
samples displayed.

Honeywell
319
12. Monitoring
The maximum samples to keep means the maximum number of samples

available to save on the file.
Start trend monitoring

Perform the following steps to start trend monitoring.
Step
320
Action
Connect to the PLC.
Click Monitor > Trend Monitoring.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
The Legend description are as follows:
Legend
Description
Bit graph: displays the data of bit address.
Bit graph index: displays the bit graph and graph colors.
Bit graph current value: displays the current value of the

bit address.
Trend graph: displays the data of word address.
Trend graph index: displays the word address and graph

colors.
Trend graph current value: displays the current value of

word address.
ATTENTION
The data displayed in the trend monitor may be different with the actual data.
In order to monitor accurate timing, use the data trace function.
For information on the data trace function, refer to Data traces.
Setting bit address

It is used to enter the bit address to monitor.
Perform the following steps to set a bit address.
Step
Action
Click Monitoring>Trend Monitoring.
Select Graph > Trend Settings.
Select the bit graph tab on the Trend Setup window.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
321
12. Monitoring
Step
Action
Enter the address of bit type or double-click the variable column to select the
declared address on the Variable/Comment window.
ATTENTION
A maximum of eight bit addresses can be registered.
Setting trend graph

It is used to set the trend address to monitor.
Perform the following steps to set a trend address.
Step
Action
Select Graph > Trend Settings.
Select the trend graph tab on the Setting Monitoring window.
Enter the address of word type or double-click the variable column to select
the declared address on the Variable/Comment window.
Click the type column to select the data type.
ATTENTION
A maximum of four trend addresses can be registered. Supported data types
are as follows:
Type
322
Size
Type
Size
BIT
1 bit
REAL
4 bytes
BYTE
1 byte
LREAL
8 bytes
WORD
2 bytes
INT
2 bytes
DWORD
4 bytes
DINT
4 bytes
LWORD
8 bytes
LINT
8 bytes

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
Setting graph
Perform the following steps to view or change graph settings.
Step
Action
Select Graph > Graph Settings. The Graph Setup window displays.
The field descriptions for Graph Setup window are as follows:
Field Label
Description
Show grid
Used to decide to show XY grid or not on the

window.
Show X-axis data
Used to decide to show X-axis data or not.
X-axis data option
Used to specify the display method of X-axis

data.
Minimum
value/Maximum value
Used to set the maximum/minimum range of

the graph.
Bit graph legend
Used to specify the position of bit graph index.

No Index, Left Upper, Right Upper, Left
Bottom, and Right Bottom are available for the
Bit Index Position.
Trend graph legend
Used to specify the position of trend graph

index. No Index, Left Upper, Right Upper, Left
Bottom, and Right Bottom are available for the
Trend Index Position.
Color
Used to specify address color of each graph.
OK

window.
Cancel
ATTENTION
R200
January 2011
The maximum/minimum value is applied only to Y-axis of the trend

graph, and not applied if View Current Y-axis is automatically adjusted.
The minimum value input cannot be greater than the maximum value.

Honeywell
323
12. Monitoring
The actual datas maximum/minimum value range and specified graphs

maximum/minimum value range are as shown below. Only the range in
gray is displayed in the graph.
If you do not select View in Setting Color, its applicable address does not
display in the graph.
Graph color settings

Perform the following steps to change the color of a graph.
Step
324
Action
Select the address to change its graph color.
Click the color column to display the Color dialog box. On the dialog box,
select a color and click OK.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
View graph option settings

Perform the following steps to view graph option settings.
Step
Action
Select the address to change its Graph Option.
Select or cancel the Check Box of View Column.
Setting graph window

It is used to decide to change View Graph Option and display the data value as necessary.
Perform the following steps to view or change graph window settings:
Step
Action
Select Graph > Graph window Settings. The Graph Window Setup
window displays.
The field descriptions for Graph Window Setup window are as follows:
Field Label
R200
January 2011
Description
View all
Displays all the bit and trend graphs.
View bit graph
Displays only the bit graph.
View graph value
Displays only the bit graph value.
View trend graph value
Displays the trend graph value.

Honeywell
325
12. Monitoring
Graph function
View cursor
It is used to display the data value where the mouse is positioned on.
Perform the following steps to view the data value the mouse is positioned on.
Step
Action
Select Graph > Show Cursor.
Click to select the graph. Whenever the mouse moves, the data value where
the cursor is positioned displays.
ATTENTION
Show cursor function is only active in the state of Stop Monitoring/Pause
Monitoring.
Scroll synchronization
It is used to synchronize the bit graph with the trend graph in time axis. It is useful in
monitoring the bit graph and the trend graph data simultaneously.
For scroll synchronization:
Select Graph > Synchronize Scrolling.
326
Move the horizontal scroll bar to scroll the bit graph and the trend graph at the
same time based on the specified scroll synchronization.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
Adjust X-axis magnification

It is used to adjust X-axis magnification.
To adjust X-axis magnification:
Select Graph > Zoom In X axis, Zoom Out X axis, Reset X-axis. Based on the
selected item, X-axiss time interval is increased, decreased or back to default value.
Adjust Y-axis magnification

It is used to adjust Y-axis magnification.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
327
12. Monitoring
To adjust Y-axis magnification:
Select Graph > Zoom In Y axis, Zoom Out Y axis, Reset Y axis. Based on the
selected item, Y-axiss height is increased, decreased or back to default value.
Adjust X-axis automatically

It is used to adjust X-axis automatically. If the automatic adjustment is set, the horizontal
scroll bar disappears and all the data can be seen at a glance.
To adjust X-axis automatically:
Select Graph > Auto-Fit X axis.
Auto-fit Y-axis
It is used to decide to adjust Y-axis automatically. The automatic adjustment of Y-axis is
applicable only to the trend graph.
To adjust Y-axis automatically:
Select Graph > Auto-Fit Y-axis.

ATTENTION
If the function of Auto-fit Y-axis is not selected, the display is based on the
maximum/minimum value specified in Graph Settings.
328

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
Save as bitmap
It is used to save the graph currently displayed on the window as bit map.
Perform the following steps to save the data as a bitmap.
Step
Action
Select Graph > Save Trend data as Bitmap.
Input a file name to save as and then click OK.
Save as text
It is used to save the graph data as a text file. Samples as many as the maximum samples
specified in setting the maximum graph saved.
Perform the following steps to save the data as a text.
Step
Action
Select Graph > Save Trend data as Text.
Input a file name to save as and then click OK.
ATTENTION
The string file is saved in CSV format of Excel.
Copy to clipboard
It is used to copy the graph currently displayed on the window onto the window
clipboard.
Perform the following steps to copy the graph to clipboard.
Select Graph > Copy to Clipboard.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
329
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data traces
12.8 Data traces

Trace Data is used to specify the trace condition and address to trace in the PLC to
collect the data complying with the specified condition from PLC. In the SoftMaster,
applicable data read from the PLC displays as a graph. While being similar to the trend
monitoring, it can collect more correct data as read from PLC.
Trace Data operates as follows.
Steps
Ready
Trace Setting
Writing to PLC
Trace starts
Read Data
Creating a graph
330
Details
Confirm the connection with PLC and the Run status of PLC.
Decide to allow trace or not and specify trigger condition, sample
properties, and trace address. For more information, refer to Trace
setting.
Write trace setting items on PLC. For more information, refer to Write
trace setting.
Start trace with specified trigger conditions automatically or with
manual trace selected. For details on trigger setting, refer to Trace
setting. For details on manual trace, refer to Write trace setting.
Read trace data from PLC. For more details, see section on Read
Trace in Write trace setting.
For more details, refer to Trace setting.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data traces
Perform the following steps to view data trace.

Step
Action
Click Monitor > Data Traces. The Data Traces window displays.
The field descriptions for Data Traces window are as follows:

Field Label
R200
January 2011
Description
a. Menu
Displays the data trace menu.
b. Tool Box
Displays the tool box of the data trace.
c. Bit graph
Index
Displays the bit address and graph color.
d. Bit graph
Displays the data of bit address.
e. Word graph
Index
Displays the word address and graph color.
f. Word graph
Displays the data of word address.

Honeywell
331
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data traces
Step
Action
g. Status bar
Displays the status of data trace.
h. Progress bar
Displays the progress status if data is read from PLC.
PLC status
Displays off-line status and the operation status of

PLC.
j. Trace status
Displays the trace status of PLC.
Connecting to PLC
To connect to the PLC:
Click Online > Connect.

ATTENTION
For more information, refer to Connection options for the PLC.
Trace setting
It is used to specify trace conditions and trace address.
Perform the following steps to view or change data trace settings.
Step
Action
Click Monitor> Data Traces. The Data Traces window displays.
On the Data Traces window, select Trace > Trace Settings from the menu.
The Data trace setting window displays.
The field descriptions for Data trace setting > Trend Setup window are as
follows:
Field Label
332
Description
Trace
Decides to allow the trace. You can enable or

disable trace.
Trigger settings
Specifies the condition for trace start. You can

select a bit trigger condition or word condition.
Bit condition
Decides to use bit trigger condition. You can

enable/disable bit trigger condition. For bit
trigger setting, refer to Step 3: Setting Bit
Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data traces
Step
Action
Trigger.
Address
Specifies the address to monitor the bit trigger

condition.
Word condition
Decides to use word trigger condition. You can

enable/disable word condition. As for word
trigger setting, refer to Step 6: Setting Word
Trigger.
Address
Specifies the address to monitor the word

trigger condition.
Sampling frequency
Specifies the cycle to collect data.
Total sample
Specifies the number of samples in total to

collect. The number of samples in total is
decided based on the input sample address.
Samples after trigger
Specifies the number of samples to collect after

triggered.
OK

window.
Cancel
Setting bit trigger

3
To set the bit trigger, select the bit condition check box.
Enter the address to use as a bit condition. Bit address format is only
available.
Specify trigger condition, where rising or falling is available. Rising means

that the address value changes from 0 to 1, and falling means that the
address value changes from 1 to 0.
Setting Word trigger
To set the Word Trigger, select the word condition check box.
It uses the variation of the word address value as a trigger condition.
Enter the address to use as a word condition. Word address format is only
available.
Enter the constant value to compare with word address value.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
333
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data traces
Step
Action
Select a condition to use to compare with the constant value input. Available
conditions are as follows:
< (less than), <= (less than or equal to), == (equal to), >= (greater than or
equal to), > (greater than),
Bit address settings
10
Select the Bit address settings tab on the Data Trace Settings window.
It is used to select the bit address to collect data. The selected address
displays in a bit graph.
The field descriptions for Data trace setting > Bit address settings window
are as follows:
Field Label
Description
Number of addresses
Displays the number of bit addresses specified.
Size of data
Displays the size of the data specified. More than

1 bit address displays in 2 bytes.
Address list
Displays the list of the bit addresses specified.

Enter the address of bit type. Right-click and
select Add Line to add a line. Right-click and
select Delete Line to delete the address.
ATTENTION
A maximum of 16 bit type addresses can be entered.
Word address settings
11
Select the word address setting tab on the Data Trace Settings window.
It is used to select the word address to collect data. The selected address
displays in a word graph.
The field descriptions for Data trace setting > Word address settings
Field Label
334
Description
Number of Address
Displays the number of word address specified.
Size of data
Displays the size of the data specified. The size is

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data traces
Step
Action
decided based on the specified data type.
Address list
Displays the list of the word addresses specified.
Address
Enter the address of word type.
Data type
Select the data type of address.
ATTENTION
A maximum of eight addresses of word type can be entered.
Supported data types are as follows:
Type
Size
Type
Size
SINT
1 byte
REAL
4 bytes
INT
2 bytes
LREAL
8 bytes
DINT
4 bytes
INT
2 bytes
LINT
8 bytes
DINT
4 bytes
USINT
1 byte
LINT
8 bytes
ATTENTION
Use the number of samples in total and the number of samples after trigger to
apply various collection methods.
Number of samples in total = number of samples after trigger: a method

to collect data after trigger, which is used when the data before trigger is
not necessary.
Number of samples in total > number of samples after triggered (0): a

method to collect data even before trigger, which is used when the data
before and after trigger is necessary.
Number of samples after triggered = 0: a method not to collect data after

trigger, which is used when the data after trigger is not necessary.
Graph settings
To view or change graph address settings:
Select Graph > Graph Settings. The Graph Setting window displays.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
335
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data traces
336
a)
Show grid: used to decide whether to show XY grid or not on the window.
b)
Show trigger: used to decide whether to display the trigger position on the
graph, and to specify the color.
c)
Bit graph legend: used to specify the position of bit graph index. The options
are displayed as: No Index, Left Upper, Right Upper, Left Bottom, and Right
Bottom for the Bit Index Position.
d)
Word graph legend: used to specify the position of word graph index. The
options are displayed as: No Index, Left Upper, Right Upper, Left Bottom, and
Right Bottom for the Word Index Position.
e)
Color setup: used to specify address color of each graph.
f)
OK: saves the changes and closes the window.
g)
Cancel: closes the window.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data traces
Graph color setting

Perform the following steps to change the color of a graph:
Step
Action
Select the address to change its graph color.
Click the color column to display color dialog box. On the dialog box, select a
color and click OK.
Trace
It is used to read the data traced from the PLC or the data specified.
Write trace setting
It applies the trace setting to the PLC.
To view write trace settings:
Click Trace > Write Trace Settings.
Read trace settings

It is used to read trace settings from the PLC.
To view read trace settings:
Click Trace > Read Trace Settings.
Read data traces

It reads trace data from PLC.
To read data traces:
Click Trace > Read Trace.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
337
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data traces
Start manual trace

It is used to start to trace data under the trace condition currently specified.
To start tracing the data manually:
Click Trace > Start Manual Trace. If data is currently traced, the applicable menu
is inactive.
Animation
Using the trace data read from the PLC, it displays the data chronological sequence.
Animation settings
To view animation settings:
Step
Action
On the Data Traces window menu, select Animation > Animation Setting.
The Animation window displays.
The field descriptions for Animation window are as follows:
Field Label
Description
Frequency
Used to specify the cycle to update the data

sample on the window. Available data update
cycles are 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, and
2000ms value.
OK

window.
Cancel
Start
It is used to start Animation. Animation is active only with trace data is available.
Click Animation > Start Animation.
Pause
It is used to stop Animation in progress momentarily.
338
Click Animation > Animation Pause/Resume.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data traces
Resume
It is used to continue Animation which was momentarily stopped.
Click Animation > Animation Pause/Resume.
Stop
It is used to stop Animation.
Click Animation > Stop Animation.
Graph function
For additional information on the basic graph functions, refer to Graph
function.
Move trigger
It moves the trigger to its generated point of time.
To move the trigger:
Click Graph > Go to Trigger Position.
File function
It is used to save or read trace setting from the file.
Open
Perform the following steps to open a file.
Step
Action
Click File > Open. The File dialog box displays.
Select a file name to open and click OK.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
339
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data traces
Save
Perform the following steps to save a file.
Step
Action
Click File > Save. The File Save dialog box displays.
Enter the file name to save with and click OK.
Save as
Perform the following steps to save a file with a specific file name.
Step
Action
Click File > Save As. The File Save dialog box displays.
Enter a different file name to save and click OK.
Save as bit map

It is used to save the graph currently displayed on the window as a bit map.
Perform the following steps to save the data as a bit map.
Step
Action
Click File > Send > Save as Bitmap.
Enter the name of a file to save and click OK.
Save text
It is used to save the graph data on the file in text. Samples as many as the maximum
samples specified in setting as maximum graph are saved.
Perform the following steps to save trace data as text.
Step
340
Action
Click File > Send > Save Trace data as Text.
Enter a file name to save and click OK.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.8. Data traces
Copy clipboard
It is used to copy the graph currently displayed on the window clipboard.
To copy the data onto the windows clipboard:
Click File > Send > Copy to Clipboard.
View function
This function is used to display or hide the tool bar and the status display line on the
window.
View tool bar
To view toolbar:
Click View > Tool Name.
View status display line

To view status display line:
Click View > Status Bar.
Data
It displays the trace data value. View Data is active only with trace data available.
To view Trace Data:
Click View > Trace Data. The Trace Data window displays.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
341
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom events
342
a)
Trace info: displays the trace sampling cycle.
b)
View Settings: displays the trace details.
c)
Data Grid: displays the current value specified in the sequence of the
samples. The sample data displays in negative before trigger, and in positive
after trigger.
d)
Minimum, Maximum, Average: displays the Minimum, Maximum, and

Average value per address.
e)
Close: closes the window.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom events
12.9 Custom events

Overview of custom events
The custom events refer to a series of events whose conditions are the addresses specified
by the user. User-defined events are registered in the PLC, which monitors the registered
events and records the event history if generated. The event history can be used to
operate and debug the system.
Perform the following steps to set custom events.

Step
Action
Create a program as follows:
Write the program to the PLC and click Monitor > Custom Event. The
Custom Event window displays.
Click Menu>Add event. The Event Setting window displays and setup basic
setting in the window.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
343
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom events
Step
Action
Click Associated Address Setup tab and setup the bit address %MX100
and word address %MW0 to store the data when the event is met.
Click OK to close the window.

Select Enable for Custom Event Capture and click OK. A message displays
since the event setup has been changed. Click Yes.
Change the PLC mode to RUN.
Click Online > Monitor > Custom Event to check event history. The
Custom Event window displays and select Event History tab.
In the Event History tab, an Event History window displays when you select
an event item, click Properties to view the list of associated address and the
details of event.
Event setting
Example
An event is defined as the data of %MW0 whose data increase by 1 if every scan is
greater than 100 and less than 110, and if the event is met, PLC stores the data of
%MW0.
Perform the following steps for event setting.
Step
Action
Click Monitor > Custom Events. The Custom Events window displays.
Click Event settings tab.

The field descriptions for Custom Events window are as follows:
Field Label
Custom Event capture
344
Description
Used to determine whether to allow the user
event or not. If the event is disabled, PLC
does not collect the Custom Events.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom events
Step
Action
Events History
Displays the list of the Custom Events

currently specified.
Menu
Displays the event setting menu.
Apply PLC
Applies the changes to CPU without closing

the window.
OK

window.
Cancel
ATTENTION
For additional information on each item of the events list, refer to Adding
custom event item.
Adding custom event item

Perform the following steps to add a custom event item:
Step
Action
On the Custom Event window, select Add Event from Menu. The Event
Setting window displays.
Select the Basic setting tab.

The field descriptions for Event Setting > Basic Setting window are as follows:
Field Label
R200
January 2011
Description
Address
Used to enter the address to monitor the events. The

event address is of the value 0 or 1 in bit format only.
Variable Names
Displays Variable/Comment dialog box. The address

can be selected from Variable/Comment declared in
the Variable/Comment dialog box.
Event condition
Used to specify the condition to make the user event

occur. If you select rising condition, the user event
occurs when the event address value changes from
0 to 1. And if you select falling condition, the user
event occurs when the event address value changes
from 1 to 0. If you select transition condition, the user
Honeywell
345
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom events
Step
Action
event occurs whenever the event address value
changes.
Type
Used to specify the user event type. You can select

an applicable type among Information, Alarm, and
Warning.
Message
Used to enter an event message. The maximum

length of the message is 80 characters in English.
The event message input is displays with Event
History menu.
OK
Click to save the changes and to closes the window.
Cancel
Enter event address information, event conditions, event type, and event
message or click Variable/Comment to select the address from the declared
Variable/Comment.
Select the Associated addresss setting tab to specify the Associated

address. Associated address is used to capture the values of related address
including any values.
The field descriptions for Event Setting > Associated addresss setting
Field Label
Description
Available
Displays the sum of the size of the

each associated address type
input, which is available up to 16
bytes.
Associated addresses Setup
Used to enter the associated

addresses. You can enter up to
eight associated addresses.
Click OK to save the entered items, or click Cancel to cancel it.
ATTENTION
Event type is specified by user based on the importance of the event and is
used as a classifying method of events for Event View.
346

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom events
For additional information on address type and display format, refer to
Registering variable/comment. Also refer to Event history.
ATTENTION
If associated addresses are specified, the value of the associated

addresses is also recorded when applicable events happen.
Up to eight associated addresses can be specified in up to 16 bytes

based on the data type of the address input. Supported data type and
its respective byte size are as follows:
Type
Size
Type
Size
BIT
1 Byte
REAL
4 Bytes
USINT
1 Byte
LREAL
8 Bytes
UINT
2 Bytes
INT
2 Bytes
UDINT
4 Bytes
DINT
4 Bytes
ULINT
8 Bytes
LINT
8 Bytes
Up to 10 custom events are available for registration.
Editing events
It is used to edit the user event items.
Perform the following steps to edit a user event.
Step
Action
Select the event to edit.
Right-click and select Edit Event from the context menu. The Event Setting
window displays.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
347
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom events
Step
3
Action
Update the changes and click OK to save the changes, or click Cancel to
cancel it.
Deleting event
It deletes the user event input.
Perform the following steps to delete an event.
Step
Action
Select the event to delete.
Right-click and select delete from the context menu.
Select Delete All from the context menu to delete all events.
Custom event capture

It is used to Enable or Disable event capture.
Corresponding to Custom Event Capture, click Enable to capture the event, or click
Disable to disable the event capture.
Event capture setting
You can enable/disable each event from being displayed.
Perform the following steps to enable/display an event.
Step
348
Action
Select the event to be enabled.
Select the checkbox corresponding to the event in the Enable column to

enable it. Clear the checkbox to disable it.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom events
Custom event copy/paste

Perform the following steps to copy/paste custom events.
Step
1
Action
Select the event to copy.
Right-click and select Copy from the context menu.
Move to the position to paste and right-click and select Paste from the
context menu.
The Event is pasted in the selected row.
Custom event cut/paste

Perform the following steps to cut/paste custom events.
Step
Action
Select the event to cut.
Right-click and select Cut from the context menu.
Move to the position to paste.
Right-click and select Paste from the context menu.
Save event
Since the user-defined event is saved in PLC, it is additionally saved to manage as files.
Perform the following steps to save all the events.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
349
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom events
Step
Action
Select the event.
Right-click and Save Event from the context menu.
Enter a file name to save on the File Save dialog box and click OK.
Open event
It read user-defined event setting from the file.
Perform the following steps to open an event.
Step
Action
On the Custom Event window, right-click and select Open Event from the
context menu.
Select a file to read and then click OK.
ATTENTION
The event if opened is added to the list of current events.
A maximum of 10 custom events are added to the list.
Event history
Read the user event history saved in the PLC to display the details.
Perform the following steps to view event history.
Step
Action
Click Monitor>Custom Event. The Custom Event window displays.
Select the Event History tab.

The field descriptions for Custom Event > Event History window are as
follows:
Field Label
Description
Event History List

350
Displays the event history available on the PLC.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom events
Step
Action
Menu
Displays the event history related menu.
Apply PLC
Inactive on the event history page.
OK

window.
Cancel
ATTENTION
For additional information on event history item, refer to Detailed

event history view.
For additional information on an event history item, refer to Detailed event
history view.
Detailed event history view

It displays the details of the event.
Perform the following steps to view the details of an event.
Step
Action
On the Custom Event window, select the item to display its Event History.
Select Information. The Event History window displays.

The field descriptions for Event History window are as follows:
Field Label
Date
R200
January 2011
Description
Displays the date when an event occurs in YearMonth-Date format.
Honeywell
351
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom events
Step
Action
Time
Displays the time when an event occurs in Hour:

Minute: Second: MS.
Condition
Displays event details specified in event setting

items.
Related address
list
Displays the associated address list and the value

when the event occurred. Right-click on View in
hexadecimal or View as specified to change the
display format of the address value.
Back
Displays the previous event history.
Next
Displays the next event history.
Copy
Copies the current event history.
Close
Closes the window.
For additional information on an event history item, refer to Detailed event
history view.
Refresh
It updates the event history with recent details in PLC.
To refresh the event history, on the Custom Event window, click Menu>Refresh.
Event filtering
The history displays based on the event type selected.
Select View All.
352

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom events
Select View Information.
Select View Warning
Select View Alarm
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
353
12. Monitoring
12.9. Custom events
354

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
13. Debugging
13.1 Start/stop debugging
Start debugging
Perform the following steps to start debugging.
Step
Action
Click Online > Connect to connect to the PLC,
Click Online > Write to download the program to the PLC.
Click Online > Change Mode > Debug or

Debug > Start/Stop Debugging.
ATTENTION
Debug is unavailable if PLC operation is in Run mode.
This function is available only with PLC in online mode.
Debug function is available only when the SoftMaster program and PLC
program are identical. If they are not identical, download the applicable
program.
Monitoring function is also available in Debug mode.
If an error occurs on the PLC, Debug instruction does not work normally.
Clear the error to run the Debug instruction.
Stop debugging
Perform the following steps to stop debugging.
Step
Action
Click Online > Change Mode > Stop or Debug > Start/Stop Debugging.
PLC ends Debug and changes to the STOP mode.
ATTENTION
Even if Debug stops, Monitoring continues.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
355
13. Debugging
13.2. LD program debugging
13.2 LD program debugging

It is used to specify functions to debug the prepared LD program.
Set remove breakpoints
It is used to set or remove the Breakpoint per step.
Set breakpoint
Perform the following steps to set Breakpoints.
Step
Action
Move the mouse cursor to the step to specify.
Click Debug > Set/Remove Breakpoints.
ATTENTION
356
The break cannot be set on the area specified by a Block Mask

instruction.
Application instruction sets the breakpoint on the instruction string area.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
13. Debugging
Remove breakpoint
Perform eth following steps to remove Breakpoints.
Step
Action
Move the Breakpoint to the step to remove.
Click Debug > Set/Remove Breakpoints.
Go
It starts program debugging using the specified Breakpoint. With the Go function, the
program can be run up to the Breakpoint specified.
Perform the following steps to run the program up to the specified Breakpoint.
Step
Action
Click Debug > Go. The program runs until the breakpoint condition is reached.
R200
January 2011
To go to the next Breakpoint, click Debug > Go.

Honeywell
357
13. Debugging
Step
Action
Go to cursor
It is used to make the program run up to the cursor position.
Perform the following steps to run the program until the cursor position.
Step
358
Action
Move the cursor to the position to run.
Click Debug > Go to the Cursor.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
13. Debugging
Step into, step out and step over functions

If the Breakpoint is engaged during debugging, its progress is made step by step. When
debugging a program, Step Into, Step Out functions are provided.
Step into
It runs the program to the next step. If the current step is an application instruction CALL
with the running condition satisfied, it enters the subroutine block.
On the menu, click Debug > Step Into.
ATTENTION
If not with CALL instruction or if the CALL running condition is not satisfied,
the program runs to the next step.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
359
13. Debugging
Step out
It is used to step out of the subroutine block once entered with Step into function
executed.
360
On the menu, click Debug > Step Out.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
13. Debugging
ATTENTION
If the currently debugged step is not inside the subroutine block, the
program is run to the next step.
Step over
It is used to run the program to the next step. Unlike Step Into, even if the current step is
an application instruction CALL, it does not enter the subroutine block but run the
program to the next step.
On the menu, click Debug > Step Over.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
361
13. Debugging
13.3. List of break points
13.3 List of break points

The list shows all the Break Points being used in the program, where the user can decide
to use or delete the Break Point.
362
On the menu, click Debug > Breakpoints List.
Use: If the breakpoint is deselected, it is not deleted from the list.
Program: Displays the name of the program where the breakpoint is used.
Step: Displays the step number where the breakpoint is caught.
Count: The number of time run, as the specified steps where the breakpoint is
caught, PLC is braked. (Example: if the breakpoint is set inside, FOR 20 ~
NEXT with the number of times 10, FOR 20 ~NEXT is run 10 times and then is
braked.)
OK: Saves the changes and closes the window.
Cancel: Closes the window without saving the changes.
Select All: Checks all the listed items to allow.
Reset: Cancels all the checked items previously allowed.
Go to: Used to move to the position where the selected breakpoint is used.
Remove: Deletes the selected breakpoints from the list.
Remove All: Deletes all the breakpoints from the list.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
13. Debugging
13.4. Variable break
ATTENTION
A maximum of 62 Breakpoints can be registered in the PLC.
13.4 Variable break

Applicable debugging is available based on the data value and the application of the
variable.
Setting variable break
On the menu, click Debug > Breakpoint Conditions. The Break Condition
window displays. Select Variable Break point tab.
R200
January 2011
a)
Use the address as a variable break point: If you do not select the check
box, the variable break even if saved, is not be used.
b)
Variable: Shows the variable name used for variable break.
c)
Program: Shows the program name of the variable used for variable break.
d)
Address: Displays the address name if the variables memory is allocated in

the local variable.
e)
Comment: Displays the comment if the variables comment is declared in the

local variable.
f)
Value Condition: If you do not select the check box, the value even if saved,
does not make the value break engaged.
Honeywell
363
13. Debugging
13.5. Scan break
g)
Value: If the specified address value is reached, the break is engaged. The
maximum/minimum value is based on the variable type.
h)
OK: Saves the changes and closes the window.
i)
Cancel: Closes the window without saving the changes.
j)
Select Variable: Finds a specific variable on the variable list.
k)
Condition: Makes the break engaged when writing the value or reading the
value from address.
Variable break run

Perform the following steps to set variable break run.
Step
364
Action
Specify the variable break.
On the menu, click Debug > Go. PLC runs debugging.
If specified variable break conditions are met, a message displays to inform

that the variable break is engaged, when PLC stops running.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
13. Debugging
13.5. Scan break
ATTENTION
Among variable types, BYTE, NIBBLE, and STRING do not support the
variable break instruction.
When the PLC is in debug mode, the meeting of any one condition
(breakpoint, variable break, scan break, and so on), applies the break.
Click the program name to move to the program position where the
variable break is applied.
If the value is changed in other application programs (such as address

monitor) other than the specified program, movement to the program
position where the variable break is applied may not be possible.
13.5 Scan break

This function is used to run PLC as many times as the scan times specified, and apply the
break.
Perform the following steps to use the Scan Break function.
Step
Action
On the menu, click Debug > Breakpoint Conditions. The Break Condition
window displays.
Select Scan Break point tab.
a)
R200
January 2011
Use Scan Break point: If you do not select this check box, the specified
scan break times even if saved, is not run while PLC runs debugging.
Honeywell
365
13. Debugging
13.5. Scan break
Step
Action
b)
Scan Count: Used to enter scan times to apply the break. 1 ~

2147483647 is available for the setting value.
Scan break run

Perform the following steps to apply scan break.
Step
366
Action
Select Use Scan Break and specify the scan times to apply the break.
If you select Debug > Go, PLC runs debugging.
PLC informs that the scan break is engaged after executing as many as
specified scan times.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
14. Online Editing

14.1 Online editing sequence
This Online Editing function is used to edit the PLC program with PLC operation status
in RUN mode.
Open Project
Connect
Start Monitoring
Start
Online Editing
* Start Online Editing starts after active.
Edit
* Start Online Editing and Write Modified Program can be repeated.
Write Modified
Program
End Online Editing
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
367
14. Online Editing

14.1. Online editing sequence
Open project
Click Project > Open Project. Opens the project identical to the PLC project to
perform Online Editing.
or
Click Project > Open from PLC.
Click Online > Connect to connect to the PLC.
Connect
Start monitoring
Click Monitor > Start Monitoring.
Online Editing is available while monitoring.
Start/Stop Monitoring is available during Online Editing.
Start online editing
368
Click Online > Start Online Editing.
Online editing is available after its program window is active and the program is
selected.
After Program or Variable is edited during Run, the program window changes to
edit mode during Run.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
14. Online Editing

If Online Editing starts, the background color of the program can be changed
through its applicable option.
Online Editing is the same as specified in the off-line Edit.
In case of the LD, the edited rung is indicated with (*).
Edit
Write modified program
Click Online > Write Modified Program.
The applicable program only is transferred to PLC.
In case of the LD, the edited rung is indicated with (*).
End online editing
R200
January 2011
Click Online > End Online Editing.

Honeywell
369
14. Online Editing

ATTENTION
Project cannot be closed during Online Edit.
One or more programs can be modified during Run.
While editing during Run, the monitoring value is not correct.
For the items to edit during Run, refer to the followings:
(Edit item means add, delete, and change are available)

Item
Project properties
Program
Global variable
Local variable
User-defined type
370
Description
Edit
Add
Delete
Change
Add
Delete
Item
Description
Edit
Add
Delete
Change
LD
Edit
IL
Edit
Change
SFC
Edit
Add
Add
Delete
Delete
Change
Change
Add
Add
Delete
Change
User-defined
function/function
block
SFC action (LD)
SFC Transition
(LD)
Delete
Change
Add
Parameter change
Edit
Delete
Local variable
retain setting
Edit
Change
Global variable
retain setting
Edit

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
15. Printing
15.1 Print project
Printing a project
This instruction is used to print the contents of a project sequentially.
It is also used to select items to be printed, specify necessary setting options for printing
per item, and execute Preview and Print instruction.
To print the contents of a project:
Click Project > Print Project. The Print Project window displays.
R200
January 2011
a)
Project Level Diagram: Displays tree structure of the item printable in the
Project. Detailed setting functions are available in the tree structure of the
Level Diagram. Print and Previous View functions are available for the
selected item.
b)
Print: Prints the selected item in the Project Level Diagram.
c)
Save Selection Item: Saves the selected item in the Project Level Diagram.
Honeywell
371
15. Printing
15.1. Print project
d)
Details: Used to specify details of the selected item in the Project Level
Diagram.
e)
Preview: Used to view the selected item before print in the Project Level
Diagram.
f)
Settings: Sets the general print options such as Printer Setting, Print Page
Setting, Margin Setting, and so on.
ATTENTION
Details button in the Project Level Tree is enabled only if you select
the Cover, Program, I/O parameter.
Refer to each print option for setting each item in detail (Program
Print Setting Program Print).
Address and Memory Reference used in the Project Level Diagram

are identical to those on the window displayed when View > Used
Address and View > Cross Reference are executed on the menu.
Print setting
It is used to specify paper to print on and the printer.
Click Settings>Page Setup on the Print Project window or right-click on the Print
Project window and select Page Setup from the context menu.
.
a)
Details: Refer to Print Setting for each item.
b)
Page Setup: Used to specify the page setup of the paper to print on.
c)
Header/Footer: Used to enter string displayed on the Header and Footer.
Page setup
It is used to specify margins of paper to print.
Perform the following steps to specify the Page setup:
372

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
15. Printing
15.1. Print project
Step
Action
Click Printer Settings on the Print window.
Select Page Setup from the context menu. The Page Setup window
displays.
a)
Shows how the page layout will look.
b)
Size: Used to select paper to print on.
c)
Orientation: Used to select a printing direction.
d)
Back to Default: Details of Margins, Header and Footer are changed

back to default, sets the basic value specified when the program is
installed.
e)
Margin Setting: Specifies margins of paper printed.
f)
Printer: Used to change the setting options of the printer.
ATTENTION
R200
January 2011
Ensure that print contents do not overwrite with header or footer

when printed, with respect to margins.
If there are no contents in header/footer, the header/footer is not

Honeywell
373
15. Printing
15.1. Print project
printed.
Header/footer setting
It is used to specify the content of Header/Footer.
374
a)
Content Setting: used to enter the content in the left/center/right of the

Header/Footer.
b)
Insert Field: used to insert the field into the position of the cursor currently
placed on the Edit Box (left, center, right).

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
15. Printing
15.1. Print project
ATTENTION
If the content of the header/footer is long, the header/footer in the left,

center or right may be printed as overwritten with each other.
The user can specify the content of the header/footer using Input and
Field at the same time.
Example: If the content of The date today is &d is input on the
header/footer The date today is 2004-06-01 is printed.
Field Content
Date: &d yyyy-mm-dd
Time: &t hh:mm:ss
Project name: &p
PLC name: &c
PLC type: &T
Page number/Total Page number: &n Page number/Total Page

number of the selected items.
Page number/Item page number: &N Page number/Item page

number of one item.
Program name: &P displays only in program print mode.
File Name: &f file name of the current project.
Path and file name: &F file name displayed with its directory route.
Project comment: &C Project comment is printed if any. If the

comment is too long may not be correctly printed.
Cover setup
It is used to specify the print cover.
Perform the following steps to specify the print cover.
Step
Action
Select Cover in the Project Level Diagram on the Print Project window.
Right-click Cover and select Details or click or press Enter key. The Cover
Setup window displays.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
375
15. Printing
15.1. Print project
Step
Action
The field descriptions for Cover Setup window are as follows:

Field Label
376
Description
Cover Paper
Default is A4 vertical. Printed differently based on the

paper setup. If the Edit Box exceeds the paper, the
exceeded area is not printed.
Margin Display
Displays the specified margins with a dotted line.
Edit Box
Displays the content printed on the cover, where the

content, font, and position can be changed.
Edit
Used to edit the content of the currently selected Edit

Box. Double-click the Edit Box or press Enter key
when the Edit Box is selected to edit. If the field is
inserted, Edit is also available.
Font
Changes font of the currently selected Edit Box.
Add
Adds a new Edit Box to the print cover.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
15. Printing
15.1. Print project
Step
Action
Delete
Deletes the currently selected Edit Box.
OK
Click to save the changes and to close the window.
Cancel
Add content
Perform the following steps to add content.
Step
Action
On the Cover Setup window, right-click and select Add from context menu.
Move the mouse on the Cover setup page. The mouse cursor changes.
Click on Cover setup page to view an Edit dialog box. Edit the required text.
Press ESC to change the mouse cursor to the arrow shape again.
ATTENTION
R200
January 2011
Edit Box can be aligned in the page. It is available through the menu,
right-click and select the alignment from the context menu.
Edit Box > Center: aligns the selected Edit Box to the center of
page.
String > left Align: aligns the content of the selected Edit Box to the
left of the page.

Honeywell
377
15. Printing
15.2. LD program print
The edge of the Edit Box is not printed.
Edit Box can be moved by Drag and Drop instruction of the mouse
or with the arrow keys.
Undo and Redo are not available.
If string including field is previously viewed, the field is displayed as

analyzed. If edited, the field is displayed back.
15.2 LD program print

It is used to print the selected LD program.
Print setting
Perform the following steps to configure the print setting.
Step
Action
Select the program item to print.
Click Project > Print. The Print Setup window displays.
The field descriptions for Print Setup window are as follows:

378

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
15. Printing
Step
Action
Field Label
Description
Select Program
Selects a program to print. In LD program, you

cannot select IL program print.
View Options
Used to specify View Options for printing. Refer

to Viewing program options for each View
Option.
Contact
Used to specify the number of contacts in a line.

The number of contact is fixed to the number
currently displayed, if printing is executed in the
LD program.
Print Range
Used to specify print range.
Print in Color
Used to decide whether print is in color or not. If

you select the check box, the print is in color,
and if you do not select, it is in black-and-white.
Print Grid
Used to decide whether to apply Grid Print or

not.
Print Output Comment
Used to print output comment.
Print
Starts to print with the currently specified

options applied.
OK
Click to save the currently specified options and

to close the window.
Cancel
Print Setting
Used to specify the printer setup options.
Page Setting
Used to invoke Page Setup window. The size

of paper and space of print page can be setup
in the Page Setup window.
ATTENTION
When printing the project, click Details after selecting the program name to
set print setup.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
379
15. Printing
Print preview
It is used to see the preview of the specified print job.
380
Click Project > Preview.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
16. User Function/Function Block

16.1 Overview
You can personally create and use a function/function block, which is not provided by
SoftMaster. The User Function/Function Block can be created as follows:
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
381

16.2. Create user function/function block
16.2 Create user function/function block

Perform the following steps to create a user function/function block.
Step
1
Action
Click Project > Add Item >-Function.
or
Click Project > Add Item > Function Block.
The User Function/Function Block window displays.
The field descriptions for User Function/Function Block window are as
follows:
Field Label
382
Description
Program Name
Used for entering a User Function/Function Block.

When the user-defined function/function is
registered, the input name is registered.
Language
Used for selecting a programming language for the

User Function/Function Block. A user-defined
function is created only by the LD language while a
user-defined function block can be created by the
LD, SFC, or ST language.
Use EN/ENO
Used for selecting whether to use or not use

EN/ENO, which is used under the operation
condition of function/function block. If you do not
select EN/ENO, you should declare BOOL type
variable in the first input and first output parameters
of the function/function block.
Return Data Type
Designates the type of the results after a userdefined function is executed. It is activated only
when a user-defined function is created.
Program
description
Used for entering the comment for a User

Function/Function Block. Unnecessarily do not
enter comment.
OK
Click to save the changes and to close the window.
Cancel
Click to cancel the changes and to close the

window.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

16.3. Create user function/function block I/O variable
Step
Action
ATTENTION
If you click OK, a new item with the name entered in the item of User
Function/Function Block creates.
16.3 Create user function/function block I/O variable

Perform the following steps to create a user function/function block I/O variable.
Step
Action
Double-click a local variable among the items created with the name of User
Function/Function Block, the following local variable window displays.
R200
January 2011
a)
VAR_RETURN: A type of variable representing the value of user-defined

function. It is automatically created as a variable with the same name of
the user-defined function with return type designated when creating a
user-defined function.
b)
Function type: Used to automatically display input variable, I/O variable,

function/function block type by output variable in the local variable
window. The type is same as when using the User Function/Function
Block in the scan program.
Add input variable, I/O variable, and output value in the local variable window.
Depending on the added I/O variables, the function/function block type is
automatically changed on the local variable window.
Honeywell
383

16.4. User function/function block programming
Step
Action
ATTENTION
Minimum input variable and output variable must be at least one.
But, the maximum number is limited to 32.
16.4 User function/function block programming

Perform the following steps to create a user function/function block programming.
Step
Action
Double-click a program among the items created with the newly created User
Function/Function Block, a program window with the previously designated
language appears.
The following window shows the screen created when selecting the LD.
384

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

16.4. User function/function block programming
Step
Action
Create a program, based on the variable input in the local variable window.
ATTENTION
If local variable edit and program edit are completed, select
function/function block toolbar instruction to check whether the
edited User Function/Function Block is registered.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
385

16.5. Working with user function/function block
16.5 Working with user function/function block

Perform the following steps to use user function/function block.
Step
386
Action
Open the program to use a User Function/Function Block and move the
cursor to the position to input.
Click Function/Function Block Toolbar.
Select a User Function/Function Block in the function/function block tool bar.

The Function/Function Block window displays.
Enter the variable to be used in the input/output of function/function block.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
17. SoftMaster Simulator

17.1 Overview of the SoftMaster simulator (SIM)
Features of SoftMaster-SIM
SoftMaster-SIM is a simulated PLC for MasterLogic PLC series. If using the SoftMasterSIM, you can run your program without the PLC, or you can debug a PLC program by
using input condition setting or module simulation function.
SoftMaster-SIM supports the following function:
Program simulation
You can simulate the program written by LD/SFC/ST in the SoftMaster. It supports
online editing by which you can edit during RUN mode and debugging function by
which you can trace the program as step unit.
PLC online function
You can use program monitoring function and online diagnosis function such as system
monitoring, address monitoring, trend monitoring, data trace, and custom events.
Module simulation
You can simulate the digital I/O module, A/D conversion module, D/A conversion
module, counter, temperature control module, positioning module. By using simulation
function, you can set the input value of each module.
I/O input condition setting
You can set address value by setting specific address value or channel value of the
module as input condition. If you use I/O input condition setting, you need not write
other program to test PLC program.
System configuration for execution of SoftMaster-SIM
The system configuration required by SoftMaster-SIM is higher than that of SoftMaster.
Minimum specification: Pentium 3900MHz, RAM 256MB.
Recommended specification: Pentium 4, 1.5GHz, RAM 512MB and more.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
387

17.1. Overview of the SoftMaster simulator (SIM)
ATTENTION
In case of minimum specification, the fixed period scan may not operate
properly because scan period may be longer than the fixed period and
disconnection may occur. Despite using recommended specification, if
system load is heavy, same phenomenon may occur. And regardless of
system specification, according to user setting like systems SLEEP mode,
disconnection can occur.
When using fixed period, fixed period error/warning dialog box may not
display.
Starting SoftMaster-SIM
Perform the following steps to start SoftMaster-SIM.
Step
388
Action
Start SoftMaster and write the program to execute through the SoftMasterSIM.
On the SoftMaster menu, click Tools > Start Simulator. If SoftMaster-SIM is

executed, the program is downloaded into SoftMaster-SIM automatically. If
SoftMaster-SIM is executed, status becomes online, connection, stop.
Click Online > Change Mode > Run and execute the download program.
When using SoftMaster-SIM, for online menu supported by SoftMaster, refer
to the following table.
Honeywell
R200
January 2011

Menu items
support
Menu items
support
Open from PLC
Fault mask
Change Mode (Run)
Module changing
wizard
Change Mode (Stop)
Start online editing
Change Mode (Debug)
Write modified program
Disconnect
End online editing
Read
Write
Pause
Compare with PLC
Resume
Set Flash Memory (Set)
Pausing conditions
Set Flash Memory

(Remove)
Reset PLC
System monitoring
Clear PLC
Address monitoring
PLC Information (CPU)
Special module
monitoring
PLC Information
(Performance)
Custom events
PLC Information
(Password)
Data traces
PLC Information (PLC

RTC)
Start/stop debugging
PLC History (Error Log)
Debug (Go)
PLC History (Mode

Log)
Debug (Step Over)
PLC History (Shut down

Log)
Debug (Step Into)
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
389

Menu items
390
support
Menu items
support
PLC History (System

Log)
Debug (Step Out)
PLC errors/warnings
Debug (Go to Cursor)
I/O Information
Set/Remove
Breakpoints
Force I/O
Breakpoints list
Skip I/O
Breakpoint conditions

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

17.2. Program window configuration
17.2 Program window configuration

Configuring the program window
The following figure displays the typical SoftMaster-SIM window.
1.
Channel list
Displays favorite channels according to module and channel. In case of module, displays
only module set in I/O parameter. In module, B0 means base number and S00 means slot
number.
2.
I/O condition
Displays single I/O condition and continuous I/O condition.

Displays simulators status:
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
391

Status
Description
Initial conditions
Displays initial status. Connection by

simulator is not available.
Connection
available
It means connection is ready and

turns on red LED.
Single I/O condition

execution
It means Single I/O condition is

under execution. Under execution,
green LED flickers.
Continuous I/O
condition execution
It means Continuous I/O is under

execution. Under execution, yellow
LED flicker.
Window
Channel list
Module channel
In tree view, double-click the channel you want to read. If you use specific channel as
favorite channel, select favorite channel check box.
392

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

Channel monitor
Perform the following steps to monitor a channel.
Step
Action
Start monitoring:
1
Click Tool > Start channel monitoring.
To modify channel current value:

1
Select the channel you want to modify the current value.
In the selected channel, move to the current value column
Double-click or press Enter. The Channel Value Modification dialog box

displays.
Module Name: displays the module name.

Channel Name: displays the channel name.
Channel type: displays the data type of the selected channel.
Bit value: in case of bit type, select off/on.
Input Value: in case it is not bit type, input the value directly.
In case the value is output value, you cannot change the current value of
each channel.
Stop channel monitoring:
1
R200
January 2011
Click Tool > Stop channel monitoring.

Honeywell
393

I/O condition
I/O condition is used to write a specific value to specific address when specific condition
is met by user input. For example, if address %IX0.0.0 becomes 1, set address
%MX0~%MX100 as 1.
The user should modify address value periodically by using the monitor current value of
SoftMaster or write other PLC program to test PLC program. SoftMaster-SIM support
reflects the data yielded to a module or entered from a module to a program.
Condition expression
Displays condition expression used in the single input condition and continuous
condition. One condition expression consists of more than one condition by combination
of conditions.
Type
Comparison
Numerical
operation
Bit
operation
394
Operator
Priority
Contents
==
Equal
!=
Not equal
>
Greater than
>=
Greater than or equal to
<=
Less than or equal to
<
Less than
Add
Subtract
Multiply
Division
&
12
Bit multiply
13
Bit sum
14
Exclusive bit sum

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

Type
Logical
operation
ETC.
Operator
Priority
Contents
&&
10
Logical multiply
||
11
Logical sum
Comparison target is address or channel.

For example, if you write address %MW0 is larger than 100 and %M10 is on as
condition expression, the condition expression is as follows:
(%MW0 > 100) && (%MX10 == TRUE)
It supports five addresses such as %I, %Q, %M, %R, %W.
Basic functions
Single I/O condition and continuous I/O has the following interface.
Adding I/O condition

Perform the following steps to add an I/O condition.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to the position to add a new I/O condition.
Click Edit > Properties.
Edit I/O condition and click OK.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
395

Step
Action
Edit I/O condition

Perform the following steps to edit an I/O condition.
Step
Action
Select an I/O condition to edit.
Click Edit > Properties.
Modify the items in the I/O condition dialog box and click OK.
Cut/Paste I/O condition

Perform the following steps to cut/paste an I/O condition.
Step
396
Action
Select I/O condition to cut.
Click Edit > Cut.
Move to the position to paste, click Edit > Paste.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

Copy/Paste I/O condition

Perform the following steps to copy/paste an I/O condition.
Step
Action
Select I//O condition to copy.
Click Edit > Copy.
Move to position to paste, click Edit > Paste.
Delete I/O condition

Perform the following steps to delete an I/O condition.
Step
Action
Select I/O condition to delete.
Insert line
Perform the following steps to insert a line.
Step
1
R200
January 2011
Action
Select line to insert.

Honeywell
397

Step
2
Action
Click Edit > Insert Line.
Delete line
Perform the following steps to delete a line.
Step
Action
Select the position you want to delete.
Click Edit > Delete Line.
Single I/O condition

In single I/O condition, if execution option is satisfied, copy the value to the selected
Address/Channel. In the tree view, click Single I/O Condition. The Single I/O
Condition window displays.
398

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

The field descriptions for Single I/O Condition window are as follows:
Field Label
Description
Use condition
Used to decide whether to use I/O condition. If you do

not select this option, SoftMaster-SIM does not use
the condition set by user.
Name
Used to enter I/O conditions name.
Description
Used to enter a description about I/O condition.
Always execute
Regardless of condition set by user, it executes

Output Setting when it starts.
Execution by button
Executes Output Setting when you press the button.
Execution by condition
expression
Executes Output Setting when it satisfies the

condition expression set by user.
View Channel Browser
Displays channel browser. It is activated when you

select the Execution by condition expression.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
399

Output Setting Tab:
a)
Address/Channel: Inputs channel or address name to register.
b)
Set value: Inputs setting value. Values available are: Address, channel, and
constant.
Continuous I/O condition

In the continuous I/O condition, when the condition is met, enter the value to the selected
address/channel in every scan continuously. . In the tree view, click Continuous I/O
Condition. The Continuous I/O Condition window displays.
The field descriptions for Single I/O Condition window are as follows:
400

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

Field Label
Description
Use condition
Used to decide whether to use I/O condition. If you do

not enable this option, SoftMaster-SIM does not use
the condition set by user.
Name
Used to enter name of the I/O condition.
Description
Used to enter a description of the I/O condition.
Always execute
Regardless of condition set by user, it executes

Output Setting when it starts.
Execution by button
Used to execute the Output Setting when you press

the button.
Execution by condition
expression
It executes Output Setting when it meets the

condition expression set by user.
Displays channel browser. It is activated when you

select the Execution by condition.
Output Setting Tab:

Field Label
Description
Repeated Execution
Select to enter the output value repeatedly.
Ignore Condition while

execution
Select whether to check the operating condition or not.
Output setting
Displays continuous value setting dialog box.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
401

ATTENTION
When setting continuous I/O, it writes the value in the continuous value
setting to each address/channel. If you set the Ignore Condition during
execution, only the first value is written. If Always Execute is set, all the
values are written in sequence. And if you set repeated value, it writes value
repeatedly.
Continuous value
no.
Value
For example,
not setting Ignore Condition while execution/ not setting Repeated
Execution (Execution by button / condition expression is false)
77777777
not setting Ignore Condition while execution/ not setting Repeated
Execution (Always execution / condition is true)
7654321
setting Ignore Condition while execution / not setting Repeated Execution
7654321
not setting Ignore Condition while execution / setting Repeated Execution
(Execution by button / condition expression is false)
77777777777777
402

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

not setting Ignore Condition while execution / setting Repeated Execution

(always execution / condition is true)
76543217654321
setting Ignore Condition while execution / setting Repeated Execution
76543217654321
Continuous value setting dialog box

Input setting value
Enter the value to set as output value in the continuous I/O condition.
The field descriptions for Continuous I/O Condition window are as follows:
Field Label
Description
Address/channel
Enter the address or channel to set value.
Value
Enter only constant such as integer, real, and

hexadecimal.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
403

Field Label
Description
OK
Click to saves the changes and to close the dialog

box.
Cancel
Click to cancel the changes without saving.
Set continuous value

Select address or channel to enter continuous value.
Perform the following steps to enter a continuous value.
Step
Action
Double-click the column to enter address/channel.
The Channel/Address Name dialog box appears.
Enter address or channel and click OK.
The field descriptions for Continuous I/O Condition window are as follows:
Field Label
404
Description
Channel/Address Name
Used to enter channel or address.
Displays the channel browser.
OK
Click to save the changes and to close the dialog box.
Cancel
Click to cancel the changes without saving.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

Input value
Perform the following steps to enter values.
Step
Action
On the Continuous Value Setting dialog box, move the cursor to the
position to enter the value.
Enter the value.
Auto fill
Perform the following steps to auto fill.
Step
Action
On the Continuous Value Setting dialog box, select the area to be copied.
Move the cursor to the corner, cursor changes.
Drag the cursor down with left mouse button pressed.
ATTENTION
R200
January 2011
If you use control key for auto fill, you can input the value according
to mouse drag direction.

Honeywell
405

I/O condition monitor

Start monitoring
To start monitoring:
On the menu, click Tools > Use single I/O condition or Tools > Use continuous
I/O condition.
End monitoring
To end monitoring:
406
On the menu, Cancel Tools > Use single I/O condition or Tools > Use continuous
I/O condition.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

ATTENTION
Program is executed from first step to last step repeatedly and this process is
called as scan program. SoftMaster-SIM is also executed through scan and
has the following process.
Module simulation
SoftMaster-SIM supports simple simulation function for the I/O module and special
module. In case of digital I/O module, it supports I/O function about I or Q area and in
case of special module it supports monitoring function such as analog input or output
value monitoring.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
407

Setting of module
All simulation function in the SoftMaster-SIM uses information set in the I/O parameter.
Hence, ensure that you set each module in the I/O parameter to simulate module and
reflect it to program.
For example, in order to simulate the following PLC system, set the I/O parameter as
follows:
Base
Slot
Module name
Module type
DC 2
Basic base
2MLI-D21A
Basic base
2MLF-AV8A
Voltage type A/D conversion

module (8 channels)
Basic base
2MLF-HO2A
Open collector type highspeed module (2 channels)
4V input 8 points
After executing the SoftMaster-SIM, the module set in the I/O parameter displays as
follows in System Monitoring.
408

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

ATTENTION
To apply I/O parameter set in the SoftMaster, download I/O parameter to
SoftMaster-SIM. In case the module has been changed, re-launch
SoftMaster-SIM module and execute the SoftMaster-SIM again.
Digital I/O module

In the digital I/O modules simulation, you can change contact points current value or
check if output is normal. According to I/O module setting in I/O parameter, it has the
following characteristics.
Not Setting I/O module
Setting I/O Module
Modification of input value
Modification of the
monitor current value is
available.
Modification of the
SoftMaster-SIM channel
value is available.
Modification of output
value
Not available
Not available
Forced I/O input
Not applied
Applied
Not applied
Applied
Analog input module (A/D conversion module)

SoftMaster-SIM supports the following analog input module.
Module Name
Support
2MLF-AV8A (Voltage type 8 channel)
2MLF-AC8A (Current type 8 channel)
2MLF-AD4S (Isolation type 4 channel)
SoftMaster-SIM supports four types of input voltage range and digital data output format
and two types of input current range. It is as follows.
Input Voltage Range
Input Current Range
Digital Data Output

Format
1 ~ 5V
4 ~ 20mA
0 ~ 16000
0 ~ 5V
0 ~ 20mA
-8000 ~ 8000
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
409

Input Voltage Range
Input Current Range
Digital Data Output

Format
0 ~ 10V
1000 ~ 5000
-10 ~ 10V
0 ~ 10000 (%)
SoftMaster-SIM supports the following analog input parameters.

Parameter
Support
Parameter
Support
Operation channel
Filter constant
Input voltage(current)
range
Filter process
Output data type
Average method
Filter process
Average value
You can set analog input value in the SoftMaster-SIM window and input range is
effective within voltage (current) set in parameter.
ATTENTION
For the analog modules parameter setting and how to use the program, refer
to the users guide of each module.
You can set the analog input value in the SoftMaster-SIM window.
Analog output module (D/A conversion module)
SoftMaster-SIM supports the following analog output module.
Module Name
410
Support
2MLF-DV4A (Voltage type 4 channel)
2MLF -DV8A (Voltage type 8 channel)
2MLF -DC4A (Current type 4 channel)
2MLF -DC8A (Current type 8 channel)

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

Module Name
Support
2MLF -DV4S (Isolation type voltage

output 4 channel)
2MLF -DC4S (Isolation type current

output 4 channel)
SoftMaster-SIM supports the following voltage (current) range and input data type.
Input Data Type
Output Voltage Range
Output Current Range
0 ~ 16000
1 ~ 5V
4 ~ 20mA
-8000 ~ 8000
0 ~ 5V
0 ~ 20mA
1000 ~ 5000
0 ~ 10V
0 ~ 10000 (%)
-10 ~ 10V
SoftMaster-SIM supports the following analog output parameter.

Parameter
Support
Operation channel
Output voltage (current) range
Input data type
Channel output status
You can input digital input value through special module variable and it is effective
within the range set in the parameter.
ATTENTION
For analog output modules parameter and how to use the program, refer to
the users guide of each module.
You can check the changed analog output value in the SoftMaster-SIM windows
channel item.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
411

High-speed counter module (HSC Module)

The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following high-speed counter module.
Module Name
Support
2MLF -HO2A (Open collector 2 channel)
2MLF -HD2A (Open driver 2 channel)
The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following high-speed counter parameter.

Parameter
412
Support
Parameter
Support
Count mode
Comparison output 0 maximum

setting value
Pulse input mode
Comparison output 1 minimum

setting value
Preset
Comparison output 0 maximum

setting value
Ring counter minimum value
Output status setting
Ring counter maximum value
Additional function mode
Comparison output 0 mode
Section setting value (ms)
Comparison output 1 mode
Pulse number per 1 cycle
Comparison output 0
minimum setting value
Frequency display mode

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

ATTENTION
For parameter specific contents of high-speed counter module and

how to use the program, refer to the users guide of each module.
In the SoftMaster-SIM windows channel item, you can change current count value.
High-speed counter simulation, compare the input count value with parameter setting
value and use it as comparison output signal.
RTD module
The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following RTD module.
Module Name
Support
2MLF -RD4A (4 channel)
2MLF -RD4S (Isolation type 4 channels)
2MLF -TC4S (Isolation type 4 channels)
The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following temperature input parameter.

Parameter
Support
Parameter
Support
Operation channel
Process Alarm High-High Limit
Sensor type
Process Alarm High Limit
Temperature unit
Process Alarm Low Limit
Filter constant
Process Alarm Low-Low Limit
Average process
Process Alarm Hysteresis
Average value
Input variation alarm setting

type
Scaling data type
Input variation alarm Upper

Limit
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
413

Parameter
Support
Parameter
Support
Scaling minimum value
Input variation alarm Lower

Limit
Scaling maximum value
Input variation alarm detection

Cycle
ATTENTION
For parameter specific content of RTD module and how to use the program,
refer to the users guide of each module.
You can set temperature input value in the SoftMaster-SIM windows channel item.
Advanced positioning module (APM module)

ATTENTION
In the SoftMaster-SIM, it cannot support the full function of APM function. The
APM module of SoftMaster-SIM is made to help you understand the function
block related with APM and its program operation and error may be different
with real PLC. SoftMaster-SIM supports part of error related with APM, some
error may occur in real PLC. The following is APM function block list that
SoftMaster-SIM supports.
For position module supported by SoftMaster-SIM, refer to the following table.

Module Name
414
Support
2MLF -PO1A (Open collector 1 axis)
2MLF -PO2A (Open collector 2 axis)
2MLF -PO3A (Open Collector 3 axis)
2MLF -PD1A (Line Driver 1 axis)

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

Module Name
Support
The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following step data parameter (X/Y/Z axis).
Parameter
Support
Parameter
Support
Coordinate
Circular interpolation sub

address [pulse]
Control method
M code
Operation pattern
ACC/DEC Number
Operation method
Operation speed
Target position [pulse]
Dwell time
Circular interpolation
direction
The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following operating parameter (X/Y/Z axis).

Parameter type
Item
Basic parameter
Bias speed
Extension parameter
External command selection
External command
External stop
External contemporary start
External speed/position
conversion
Origin address
Home high speed
Home low speed
JOG high speed
Origin/manual parameter
Origin/Manual parameter
R200
January 2011
Support

Honeywell
415

Parameter type
Item
Support
JOG low speed
Inching speed
The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following APM exclusive function block.

Function Block
416
Command
Support
APM_ORG
Homing start
APM_FLT
Floating origin setting
APM_DST
Direct start
APM_IST
Indirect start
APM_LIN
Linear interpolation start
APM_CIN
Circular interpolation start
APM_SST
Simultaneous start
APM_VTP
Speed/position
conversion
APM_PTV
Position/speed conversion
APM_STP
Stop
APM_SKP
Skip operation
APM_SSP
Position sync.
APM_SSS
Speed sync.
APM_POR
Position override
APM_SOR
Speed override
APM_PSO
Speed override with

position
APM_NMV
Continuous operation
APM_INCH
Inching start
APM_RTP
Manual operation
previous location return

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

Function Block
Command
Support
APM_SNS
Start step number

modification
APM_SRS
Repeated step number

modification
APM_MOF
M code off
APM_PRS
Current position preset
APM_ZONE
ZONE output allowance
APM_EPRS
Encoder preset
Teaching function block
APM_EMG
Emergency stop
APM_CLR
Error reset
APM_PST
Point operation
APM_PWR
Point operation step data

setting
APM_SRD
Read current status
APM_CRD
Read operation status

code information
APM_ENCRD
Read encoder value
APM_JOG
JOG start
APM_MPG
Manual pulse operation
The following is APM command error code in the SoftMaster-SIM.

Error code
Meaning
151
Operating datas operating speed cannot be set as 0.
221
Direct start command cannot be executed during operation.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
417

Error code
418
Meaning
224
Direct start command cannot be executed in the absolute

coordinate of zero point non-determination status.
231
Indirect start command cannot be executed during operation.
234
Indirect start command cannot be executed in the absolute

291
Contemporary start command cannot be executed during

operation.
294
Contemporary start command cannot be executed in the absolute

321
Decreased speed stop command can be executed during

operation.
331
Skip command can be executed during operation.
355
There is an error in the setting of speed synchronous commands

master/slave axis.
356
There is an error in the setting of speed synchronous commands

master/slave axis rate.
361
Position override command can be executed during operation.
371
Speed override command can be executed during operation.
391
Continuous operation command can be executed during

operation.
401
Inching command cannot be executed during operation.
431
Auto operation point return command cannot be executed during

operation.
441
Start step number modification command cannot be executed

during operation.
461
Position teaching command cannot be executed during operation.
481
Inner emergency stop.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

ATTENTION
Positioning module specific parameter is set in the APM package. To

set parameter used in the positioning module, set operating
parameter in the APM package and save project file as follows. And
APM project file should be in the SoftMaster project file folder.
BxSyz.apm (x base number, yz slot number, no distinction between small and

capital letters).
Base
Slot
Project Storage
Name
B0S0.apm
10
B0S10.apm
B1S0.apm
11
B1S11.apm
B2S0.apm
12
B2S12.apm
For specific parameter setting of APM module, refer to the APM

package users guide.
You can check APM modules status in the SoftMaster-SIM windows channel item.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
419

ATTENTION
Meaning of channel name of positioning module is as follows:

(Example: X axis standard)
Channel Name
420
Meaning
XCurrentPosH
Upper 16 bit among Xaxis current position

value
XCurrentPosL
Lower16 bit among Xaxis current position

value
XCurrentVelH
Upper 16 bit among Xaxis current speed value
XCurrentVelL
Lower 16 bit among Xaxis current speed value

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

17.3. Limitations
17.3 Limitations
SoftMaster-SIM has the following limitations in comparison with real PLC.
Watchdog timer
In 2MLI PLC, you can set watchdog timer to prevent error. But in SoftMaster-SIM, it
does not work properly because scan time in SoftMaster-SIM is longer than that in PLC.
Communication module
SoftMaster-SIM does not support function related with communication module. So the
following function block does not work and is saved in SoftMaster-SIM.
Category
Name
Function
Station address setting
P2PSN
Sets other station address
Reading area setting

(BOOL)
P2PRD_BOOL
Sets BIT data reading

area

(BYTE)
P2PRD_BYTE
Sets BYTE data reading

area

(WORD)
P2PRD_WORD
Sets WORD data reading

area

(DWORD)
P2PRD_DWORD
Sets DWORD data

reading area

(LWORD)
P2PRD_LWORD
Sets LWORD data

reading area
Writing area setting

(BOOL)
P2PWR_BOOL
Sets BIT data writing area

(BYTE)
P2PWR_BYTE
Sets BYTE data writing

area

(WORD)
P2PWR_WORD
Sets WORD data writing

area

(DWORD)
P2PWR_DWORD
Sets DWORD data writing

area

(LWORD)
P2PWR_LWORD
Sets LWORD data writing

area
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
421

17.3. Limitations
422

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
18. ST Edition
18.1 Writing ST program
ST based on character is a program language and conforms to IEC 61131-3.
Scan program, user function/FB, SFC can be written by ST language.
Adding scan program
Perform the following steps to add a scan program.
Step
Action
Select Scan Program in the project window.
Click Project > Add item > Program. The Program window displays.
Select Language as ST, enter program name and description.
Adding user function/function block

Perform the following steps to add a user function/function block.
Step
Action
Select User Function/Function Block in the project window.
Click Project > Add Item > Function or Function Block. The User
Function/Function Block window displays.
Enter the name and description. Select ST as Language. In case of Function,

select Return data type.
Adding SFC transition, action

Adding SFC transition
Perform the following steps to add transition.
Step
1
R200
January 2011
Action
Select the transition in which you want to input program in SFC program.

Honeywell
423
18. ST Edition
18.1. Writing ST program
Step
Action
After you select the transition, double-click or press Enter. The Transition
Properties window displays.
Enter the name and comment.
Select Type as Program.
Select Language as ST in Add Program window.
Perform the following steps to add an action.

Step
424
Action
Enter the Name and Comment.
Select Type as Program in the Action Properties window.
Select Language as ST in the Add Program window.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
18. ST Edition
18.2. Limit
18.2 Limit
When editing ST language, the limit is as described below.
Item
Content
Maximum number
of character in one
line
Limit
Maximum number of character in one line is

2048 for English and 1024 for Korean.
2048
ATTENTION
Only one scan program is available.
Language of User Function/Function Block, SFC transition and action

can be different from language of scan program.
Program written in other languages cannot be converted.
18.3 Editing program

Shortcut keys
The followings are the shortcut keys.
You can change shortcut key using Tools > Shortcut key Settings.
Action
Shortcut Key
Description
Copy
Ctrl + C
Copies selected character string.
Paste
Ctrl + V
Pastes copied character string.
Delete
Del
Deletes selected character string.
Cut
Ctrl + X
Copies selected character string and deletes it.
Undo
Ctrl + Z
Cancels the changes.
Redo
Ctrl + Y
Cancels Redo action.
Select All
Ctrl + A
Selects all character strings.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
425
18. ST Edition
18.3. Editing program
Copy/paste
Copies selected character string into clipboard and pastes it.
Perform the following steps to copy and paste the character string.
Step
Action
Select the character string to copy.
Click Edit > Copy.
Move to location to paste the copied character string.
Click Edit > Paste.
ATTENTION
Clipboard: memory area of PC to save temporary information.
When parting, if you select the area, the character string is

overwritten and if you do not select the area, it is inserted.
Only text is pasted.
Undo/redo
Undo cancels edition and Redo cancels Undo action.
Perform the following steps to do Undo and Redo actions.
Step
1
Action
After executing Paste, click Edit > Undo.
Pasted contents are deleted.
Click Edit > Redo.

Paste action is executed again.
426

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
18. ST Edition
Adding/selecting variable
Enter a variable at the selected location.
Perform the following steps to add or select variable.
Step
1
Action
After moving the cursor, click Edit > Select/Add Variable. The Select
Variable window displays.
The field description for Select Variable window are as follows:
Field Label
R200
January 2011
Description
Variable
Enter the name of direct variable or declared

variable. If the entered character string is
variable type and is not registered as variable,
Variable Addition/Edit dialog box appears.
Local variable
Displays the declared local variable list.
Direct variable
Displays direct variable comment.
Flag
Displays flag in the list. Type of flag list can be

selected in List.
List
Displays type of flag list. There is system/highspeed link/P2P/PID.
All
Select whether to display only flags related

with Parameter number, Block index or not.
Parameter number
Enter number to sort flags. 0~12 for highspeed link, 0~12 for P2P, 0~63 for PID.
Block index
Enter number to sort flags. 0~127 for highspeed link, 0~63 for P2P.
Global Variable
Displays global variable list. It is available to

register as EXTERNAL variable.
New Variable
Invokes a dialog box to add variable to local

variable list.
Edit Variable
Invokes a dialog box to edit the selected

variable.
Delete Variable
Deletes the selected local variable from local

variable list.
Honeywell
427
18. ST Edition
Step
Action
OK
Click to saves the entered or selected items

and to close the dialog box.
Cancel
Click to closes the dialog box.
When you select, add a new variable. The Variable Name Add window
displays. The field description for Variable Name Add window are as follows:
Field Label
Description
Variable
Enter variable name.
Data Type
Selects data type of variable.
Variable Kind
Selects variable Kind of variable.
Address
Assigns direct address about variable.
Initial Value
Enter initial value of variable.
Trigger
Select trigger status about variable.
Retain
Select retain status about variable.
Description
Enter description about variable.
Inserts variable at the cursor location.
ATTENTION
If you select Select/Add Variable with cursor placed in the

empty area, you can add new variable.
If you select Select/Add Variable after selecting character

string, the character string is replaced into variable.
Inserting function/function block

Insert Function/Function Block at the cursor location.
Perform the following steps to insert function or function block.
Step
428
Action
Move the cursor to insert.
Click Edit > Function/FB. The Function/Function Block window displays.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
18. ST Edition
Step
Action
The field description for Function/Function Block window are as follows:
Field Label
Description
Name
Enters name of Function (Block) to use.
Search
Searches Function (Block) about the entered

name.
List
Used for sorting Function, Function Block.
Category
Indicates category of Function (Block).
Function List
Displays list of Function (Block) in the selected

category.
Function Information
Displays information of Function (Block). In

case of Function, it is available to set
properties about input parameter. In case of
Function Block, it is available to set instance
name and instance class.
OK

window.
Cancel
Click to closes the window.
Function/Function Block is inserted.
ATTENTION
I/O parameters of function/function block are not inserted
automatically. Additionally, you should edit them.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
429
18. ST Edition
18.4. Viewing program
18.4 Viewing program

It describes about display properties in the ST program.
ST option
Perform the following steps to view ST option.
Step
Action
Select ST.
The field description for Options window are as follows:
Field Label
430
Description
Parameter information
When inserting Function/FB, example text of

IO parameter is added.
Auto list members
When you insert character string by keyboard,

variable or Function/FB starting with same
character displays.
Auto macro statement
When you insert the control text of ST (IF,

WHILE, SWITCH), control text is completed
according to ST grammar.
Tab size
Enters tab size.
Show tip text
When cursor is on the character string in ST

program, description of character string
displays.
Auto indent
When changing line with ENTER, indent is

applied automatically with same tab size of
previous line.
Enhance
Character string used in ST program displays

with various colors according to variable,
comment, Function (Block).

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
18. ST Edition
Font/color
It is used for designating the font or color in the ST program.
Perform the following steps to change the font in the ST program.
Step
Action
Select ST > Font/Color.
Change Font.
ATTENTION
You cannot change the character size.
Default font is Fixedsys.
Perform the following steps to change the color in the ST program.

Step
Action
Select ST > font/color.
Change color.
Zoom
ST program does not support Zoom function.
Tab
When using Tab, Tab size is designated.
Perform the following steps to change the tab size.
Step
Action
Select ST.
Select Change Tab size. For tab size 4, the screen is as follows:
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
431
18. ST Edition
Step
Action
ATTENTION
Default tab size is 4.
Range of tab size is 1~100.
Showing line numbers

Shows/hides line numbers in the ST program.
Perform the following steps to show line numbers.
Step
432
Action
Select SoftMaster Common Editor.
Check Show line numbers.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
18. ST Edition
18.5. Additional edit functions
18.5 Additional edit functions

This section describes additional edition functions.
Book mark
You can set and remove the bookmarks.
Setting bookmark
Perform the following steps to set the bookmark.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to set bookmark.
Removing bookmark
Perform the following steps to remove the bookmark.
Step
Action
Move the cursor to remove bookmark.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
433
18. ST Edition
Step
Action
Removing all bookmark

To remove the bookmark:
Click Edit > Bookmark > Remove All.
Previous bookmark
To go to previous bookmark:
Click Edit > Bookmark > Previous Bookmark.
Next bookmark
To go to next bookmark:
Click Edit > Bookmark > Next Bookmark.

ATTENTION
Bookmark is set by line unit.
Undo/Redo cannot cancel action about bookmark.
Selection from character string list

When entering character string, it displays the character string starting with same
character string and you need to select the character string properly.
Perform the following steps to select character string.
434

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
18. ST Edition
Step
Action
Enter character string by keyboard.
Select character string from list.
Press Enter or double-click the character string.
ATTENTION
Following are the descriptions of character string list bit map.
1.
R200
January 2011
: ST language key word (IF, CASE WHILE, and so on.)
2.
: Variable name
3.
: Flag variable name
4.
: Function name
Honeywell
435
18. ST Edition
Step
Action
5.
: Function block instance name
6.
: User-defined function name
7.
: User-defined function block instance name
Selecting member variable from character string list

It is used for selecting member variable from character string list by name of FB or user
data type instance.
Perform the following steps to select member variable from character string list.
Step
1
Action
Enter . after name of FB or user data type instance.
For example, instance name of TON is TON_Inst.
Select member variable to input.
Press Enter or double-click.
Setting/removing block mask

Sets or removes the Block Mask area. The Block Mask area is not executed.
Block Mask area is indicated by symbol (* and *).
436

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
18. ST Edition
Setting block mask

Perform the following steps to set block mask.
Step
Action
Select area to set Block Mask.
Click Edit > Set/Remove Block Mask.
Removing block mask

Perform the following steps to remove block mask.
Step
Action
Select area in which Block Mask is already set.
Click Edit > Set/Remove Block Mask.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
437
18. ST Edition
Step
Action
Setting/removing line block mask

Selected line is not executed.
Symbol // Is used to set Line Block Mask.
Setting line block mask
Perform the following steps to set line block mask.
Step
438
Action
Select area to set line block mask.
Click Edit > Set/Remove Line Block Mask.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
18. ST Edition
Removing line block mask

Perform the following steps to remove line block mask.
Step
Action
Select area to remove line block mask.
Click Edit > Set/Remove Line Block Mask.
Indent/outdent
Enables you to indent/outdent at the selected area.
Indent
Perform the following steps to indent.
Step
Action
Select area to indent.
Press TAB.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
439
18. ST Edition
Step
Action
Outdent
Perform the following steps to outdent.
Step
440
Action
Select area to outdent.
Press Shift + TAB.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
19. Event Input Module

19.1 Overview
The 2MLF-SOEA Module (event input module) is used for recording of events entered
from outside. The event input module is a data recording device which can record event
information (time and state) in 1ms resolution. The event input module is not a program
device or external device used in the CPU. Using the SOE monitor, the event input is
available only for monitoring and file saving.
2MLK/I/R CPU: saves 3000 events at maximum (Up to 3000 events can be saved in
the order of occurrence.)
2MLF-SOEA module: save 300 events at maximum.
Characteristics of SOE monitor

1.
This is a software package for the operation and monitoring of the 2MLF-SOEA
module of 2MLT series.
2.
This package provides a function that enables independent operation of the SOE
monitor, regardless of the SoftMaster.
3.
This enables data monitoring and saving.
Functions of the SOE monitor

The SOE monitor is an exclusive software package which runs on a PC platform and
communicates with the CPU of ML200 series for easy and fast operation of 2MLFSOEA.
The major functions of the SOE monitor are as follows:
1.
Read/save event history
2.
Delete event history
3.
View module parameter setting
4.
Save event history in an Excel file
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
441

19.2. Screen configuration
Files created in the SOE monitor

When you create and edit a project, the files having the extensions below are created.
<Name>.set: the log file for the event the user has created. This file is created for
saving the event.
<Name>.xls: the module event file created by the user. Event record is saved in an
Excel file.
19.2 Screen configuration

This section describes the basic screen elements, windows and pop-up menus.
On the Monitor menu, click SOE Monitoring in the SoftMaster monitor state. The
following window displays.
442

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

Field
Description
Menu
Basic menu is provided for using the software program.
Tools
Menu can be easily selected and executed with toolbar.
SOE
Shows the elements of the current project.
Event monitor
window
Shows the event information of the module selected in

the project.
Status bar
Shows the information of the event and connected PLC.
Menu structure
If you select a menu item, commands appear. The commands can be executed with
mouse or keyboard. Some menus provide shortcut keys.
File
Command
Description
New logging session
Creates the project.
Open logging
Opens an existing log file.
Save logging as
Saves the log file with a different file name.
Export to file
Saves the current log data in an Excel file.
Exit
Ends the SOE monitor.
View
Command
Description
All Event
Shows all hidden events in an activated window.
Filtering
Shows only the events meeting the filtering criteria.
Newest First
Shows the data in the order of recent to old in the

monitor window.
Oldest First
Shows the data in the order of old to recent in the

monitor window.
Compare Event
Compares the events.
Find event
Searches the desired event.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
443

Command
Module Property
Description
Shows parameter setting (in online operation)
Online
Command
Description
Connect/Disconnect
Connects or disconnects from the PLC.
Connection setting
Sets up access method.
Clear PLC Event History Deletes the event data saved in the PLC CPU memory.
Clear SOE Module
Event History
Deletes the event data saved in the SOE module

memory.
Clear all SOE Module

History
Deletes all the event data saved in the memory of the

SOE module in the PLC system.
Refresh Event
Loads the event data of the SOE module.
Download SOE O/S
Downloads the O/S files to SOE module.
Tool
Command
Description
Option
User can configure SOE monitor environment for user

convenience.
Customize
User defines tools and commands.
Window
Command
444
Description
New window
Opens a new window in the activated window.
Cascade
Arranges the windows in the SoftMaster in cascade

layout.
Tile Horizontally
Arranges the windows in the SoftMaster in horizontal

layout.
Tile Vertically
Arranges the windows in the SoftMaster in vertical

layout.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

Command
Description
Close all
Closes all the windows of the SoftMaster.
Help
Command
Description
About SOE monitoring
Provides the information on the SOE monitor.
Tools
Frequently used menu items are provided with respective shortcut keys (icons).You can
click the icon to execute the menu.
Perform the following steps to create a new toolbar.

Step
1
Action
On the Tools menu, click Customize.
The Customize window displays.
Click New.
The New Toolbar dialog box appears.
Enter tool name.
Click OK. A toolbar without tool creates.

The field description for Customize window are as follows:
Field
Description
Toolbars
Select/clear the check box to make the toolbar

appear/disappear.
New
Creates a new toolbar.
Reset
Initialize the toolbar.
Select the Command tab.
Click OK to create a toolbar.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
445

SOE event history window

The SOE monitor displays the 2MLF-SOEA module SOE event history window
automatically when connected with PLC CPU.
Double-click the desired module to run the event monitor window.
CPU event history: Select the event saved in the CPU module.
Module event history: Select the event saved in the SOE module.
Double-click the CPU event history or module event history to activate the event monitor
window.
Status bar
The following figure displays the status bar of SOE Monitoring window.
446
Event No.: Shows the number of the events in the event monitor window.
PLC name: Shows the name of the PLC connected with the SOE monitor.
Honeywell
R200
January 2011

19.3. Basic parameter setting
Online: Shows the PLC connection status of the SOE monitor.
19.3 Basic parameter setting

Basic parameters of the 2MLF-SOEA can be set up using the menu or toolbar of the
SoftMaster.
Setting items
Sets up the method of saving the history occurred in the 2MLF-SOEA module in the
CPU module.
In the project tree, click Parameter > Basic Parameter. The Basic Parameter Settings
window appears.
Save the latest SOE events: Used for saving the most recent event. If there are more
than 3000 events, the oldest event is deleted and the new event is saved.
Save the first SOE events: Used to maintain the first event. If there are more than
3000 events, no new events will be saved.
19.4 I/O parameter setting

I/O parameters of the 2MLF-SOEA can be set up using the menu or toolbar of the
SoftMaster.
Setting item
It sets up the method of saving the external event history in the 2MLF-SOEA module.
Perform the following steps to set I/O parameter.
Step
Action
In the project tree, click Parameter > I/O Parameter. The I/O Parameter
Setting window displays.
In the I/O Parameter Setting window, click the slot of the base where the
module is mounted.
In the example below, the 2MLF-SOEA module is at #4 slot, #0 base.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
447

19.4. I/O parameter setting
Step
448
Action
In the I/O Parameter Setting window, select the desired module from the
drop-down arrow.
After selecting the module, click Details. The SOE Module window displays.
The field description for the SOE Module window are as follows:

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

Step
Action
Field
Input Filter
Description
Sets up the time which enables an event to be
identified as an effective input data.
(Setting range: 1ms ~ 100ms)
SOE History
Reset with recent history: used to save the most

recent events.
If the events exceed 300, the oldest event is
deleted and the last one is saved.
Retain initial history: used to retain the initial
event.
If the events exceed 300, the last one will not be
saved.
Event setting
details
Set up the input condition of the event.

Type: Rise, Fall or simultaneously, Rise/Fall of
event can be set up.
Event conditions can be set up for each input
contact point.
Chattering: Abnormal signals not related with
event can be processed as chattering.
(Setting range: 2~127)
Example of input filter setting

Condition is as follows:
Input filter: 1ms
Detail event setting: Rise/Fall events simultaneously
Sequence diagram of event occurrence is as follows:
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
449

Chatter setting
Chatter setting enables the module to identify an event repeated many times during a
short period of time as chattering, and not an effective event. Some sensors using
mechanical contacts may cause chattering, which can be eliminated with this function.
Setting items
1.
450
Number of events: 2~127 (0: detection is disabled)
2.
Event number: Enter the number of the events including the first effective signal
(minimum 2)
3.
Chatter detection time (duration): If the chatter detection time is passed from the
time the first effective event was detected, the chatter detection function for the
specific event frequency is terminated, even if the set-up number of chattering is not
completed.
4.
Minimum chatter detection time (duration): Co-related with the set up chattering
event number.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

19.5. View module information
In addition, since an event has passed the input filter, it should satisfy following criteria:
(Number of Events Input Filter Value) Chatter Detection Time (Duration)
or
Input Filter Value (Chatter Detection Time (Duration) / Number of Events)
For example:
If, chatter detection time = 30ms, number of chattering events = 5,
30ms 5 = 6ms,
Therefore, the input filter must be less than 6ms.
Example of chatter setting
Condition:
Input filter: 1ms
Detail event setting: Rise event
Chatter event: 4
Chatter time: 8ms
Sequence diagram of event occurrence is as follows:
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
451

19.5. View module information
Chatter time measurement: begins from the recognition of an event
Two of the four events passing the filter are ignored by chatter detection function.
The last event which enters after expiration of the chatter detection time is recorded
normally as the first event of a new period.
19.5 View module information

SoftMaster supports viewing event input module information.
Perform the following steps to view module information.
Step
Action
Click Online > Connect. After connecting to PLC, click Online > I/O
Information. The I/O information window displays.
Click Details. The module 2MLF-SOEA information displays.
19.6 Event history monitor

The events entered into the CPU and event input modules can be monitored with the SOE
monitor.
Perform the following steps to monitor event input modules with SOE monitor.
Step
Action
Click Online > Connect. The SOE Monitoring menu is activated only after
connecting to PLC.
Click Monitor > SOE Monitoring. The SOE Monitoring window appears.
From the SOE Monitoring window, click Online > Connect.

The information of the event input module in the connected system displays.
CPU Event History: the event history stored in the CPU module.
Module Event History: the event history stored in the SOEA module.
Double-click the CPU event history or module event history to activate the
event monitor window.
452
Double-click CPU Event History and click Online > Refresh Event.
Double-click Module Event History and click Online > Refresh Event.
Honeywell
R200
January 2011

19.6. Event history monitor
Step
Action
Event history information:
Click View > All Event to search and compare all events.
Click View > Filtering to search the behavior of a specific event. The Event
Filtering window displays.
The field description for Event Filtering window are as follows:
Field
R200
January 2011
Description
Specify Event
Occurred Position
Specify the bit at which the event has occurred.
Event type
Specify the input condition at which the event has

occurred.
Show SOE
installed position
only
Used only for CPU event history filtering. Only the

base and slot of event input module appears.
Base/Slot
Used only for CPU event history filtering. Specifies

base and slot.
Begin/End
Specify the event filter with the time and the first
event, and the last event.

Honeywell
453

Example of event filter

Event occurrence point filter setting:
Filtering result:
#0 bit
Event occurrence point setting: No. 0 bit
Event type setting: Rise event.
Rise Event
You can also filter events based on Base and Occurred time.
Prioritizing events
454
Priority to the recent events: the recent events have priority over the old events in
the display list.
Priority to old events: the old events have priority over the recent events in the
display list.
Honeywell
R200
January 2011

To view the recent events first, click View > Newest First.
From recent to older events
To view the old events first, click View > Oldest First.
From old to recent events
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
455

19.7. Save as an excel file
Comparing events
Compare the events stored in the CPU and event input modules and show the result.
To compare the events, click View > Compare Event.
Deleting event history

Delete CPU history: the history stored in the CPU module is deleted.
To delete CPU history:
Click Online > Clear PLC Event History
To delete the history stored in the module:
Click Online > Clear SOE Module Event History
To delete the history stored in all the SOEA modules:
456
Click Online > Clear All SOE module History

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

19.7 Save as an excel file

This section describes how to save an event file as an excel file.
Perform the following steps to save an event file as an excel file.
Step
Action
Select the event history to be converted into an Excel file in the event monitor
window.
Click File > Export to file.
Enter a new file name in the Save As dialog box.
Click Save to create a new Excel file.
ATTENTION
The conversion to an Excel file is effective only for the currently
active main screen (one window).
5
R200
January 2011
Open file in the Excel application (to read the saved event file in Excel).

Honeywell
457

458

Honeywell
R200
January 2011
20. Dedicated ML200R Function

20.1 Redundancy parameter
Redundancy parameter is configured for redundant operation. Redundant parameter
configuration is classified into operation mode setting and data synchronization area
setting.
Unlike the other parameters, redundancy parameter can be changed during operation and
modified parameter is synchronized between the master and the standby CPU, as soon as
the parameters are written to the PLC.
Note that you must use the Write to PLC function, to download the modified parameter.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
459

20.1. Redundancy parameter
Redundancy
parameter
Contents
Base
Though base error occurs in normal RUN

mode, system operates except for the
base. And, if that base is restored, it
operates normally.
Module
Though module is disabled, module

detachment error does not appear. If that
module is enabled, it operates normally.
Restart and wait
When two power modules of expansion

base are off, system is into WAIT mode
(Ebxx).
Base power failure error
When two power modules of expansion

base are off, CPU error appears.
Disable warning for single

power operation
Disables warning message when one of the

power modules in expansion base is off.
Disable warning for ring

topology
Disables warning message when ring

topology is failed.
Disable warning for single

CPU mode
Disables warning message when the

project requires only master CPU without
redundant operation.
Disable warning message

for fault mask removal
Disables warning message when fault

mask is removed.
Disconnection of the cable
When the cable is disconnected, it is

instantly switched within 1s.
Hot Swapping
Option
Extended Base
Power Failure
Setup
Warning Option
Switching
condition
Disconnection of the server

connection
I/Q Base
Redundancy
Synchronization
Area
460
Operation
Master automatic switchover (redundancy

operation)
When Master/Standby is acting as FEnet
server, if the cable of the Master is
disconnected, Standby becomes Master.
It synchronizes the data of I/Q Base data. It
can set from the first base to the final base.
Select the check box, to determine whether
to synchronize the I/Q area or not. If you
select the check box, it synchronizes from
first base to final base. The default value is
0~31 base.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

20.1. Redundancy parameter
Redundancy
parameter
R200
January 2011
Contents
Operation
M Area
It synchronizes data of M area. It can set

from the position of first word to the position
of final word. Select the check box, to
determine whether to synchronize the M
area or not. If you select the check box, it
synchronizes from first area to final area.
The default value is %MW0~%MW2000.
R Area
It synchronizes data of R area. It can set

from the position of first word to the position
of final word. Select the check box, to
determine whether to synchronize the R
area or not. If you select the check box, it
synchronizes from first area to final area.
The default value is %RW0~%RW2000.
W Area
If R area is set, synchronization area of W

defines automatically.
PID Block
It synchronizes data of PID block. It can set

from the first block to final block. Select the
check box, to determine whether to
synchronize the PID block area or not. If
you select the check box, it synchronizes
from block area to final block area. The
default value is 0 block.

Honeywell
461

20.2. Redundancy PLC state window
20.2 Redundancy PLC state window

Redundancy PLC state window appears automatically when SoftMaster connects with
2MLR PLC.
The following table describes the fields in the Redundancy PLC state window.
Field
462
Description
Project name of SoftMaster or Program name of SoftMasterNM/System Monitor.
A-side PLC Run mode.
A-side PLC Warning: No display if warning does not exist.
A-side PLC error: No display if error does not exist.
Standby CPU image: Shaded PLC.
CPU status display: Standby, A-side.
Signal line: 1 lineBus topology, 2 linesRing topology.
CPU status display: Master, B-side.
B-side PLC error: No display if warning does not exist.
B-side PLC warning: No display if error does not exist.
B-side PLC Run mode.
Master CPU image: Colored PLC.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

20.3. Control redundancy
20.3 Control redundancy

To control redundancy:
Click Online > Control Redundancy.
Change of master CPU
The following table describes the fields in the Redundancy control window.
Field
Description
Master CPU
Display of Master CPU, A-side or B-side.
You can do a switchover the Master CPU
It displays state of redundancy

changeable state. If it is disabled, it
displays the possible case to make
redundancy change.
Change
Redundancy change command. If

redundancy change is not disabled, it
displays inactive mode.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
463

20.3. Control redundancy
ATTENTION
The redundancy state is changeable:
1.
When the Master CPU is in stop mode.
2.
When the Master CPU has error.
3.
When the redundancy system is in run mode.
Standby CPU control
The following table describes the fields of the Standby CPU in the Redundancy Control
window.
Field
464
Description
The Standby CPU is available: Available Standby CPU state
Standby CPU mode: Standby CPU Run/Stop mode change
Standby CPU mode: Only Standby CPU Reset or Overall reset

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

20.4 System monitoring

System configuration and base information displays in System Monitoring window.
System configuration
To perform system configuration:
Click PLC > System Configuration.
System configuration contains below information:

R200
January 2011

Honeywell
465

1.
Connection state between base.
2.
Connection cable type between base.
3.
In case of electric cable, it displays measured time and distance.
4.
It displays data synchronization cable between Master and Standby CPU.
5.
It displays base information of selected base (click mouse button or press enter key).
Node count change

Node Count Change enables you to decide how many nodes displays in window.
To change Node Count:
Click View > Node Count, then select node among [2], [3], [4], [5], [6].
Default setting value is 2.
466
To view node count [2]: click View > Node Count - [2].

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

To view node count [4], click View > Node Count - [4].
Base information
It displays base information installed in base.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
467

Master/standby base
The above diagram displays the following:

1.
It displays information and base number of CPU module.
2.
State indicator: It indicates state of CPU.
3.
RING: If it consist of Ring topology, LED indicates On.
4.
RED: If it is operated by Redundancy operation, LED indicates On.
5.
MASTER: If it is in master mode, LED is On.
6.
CPU-A: If CPU-A is On, LED indicates On.
7.
CPU-B: If CPU-B is On, LED indicates On.
8.
RUN: If operation mode is Run mode, LED indicates On.
9.
STOP: If operation mode is Stop mode, LED indicates On.
10. WAR: Warning occurs in CPU, LED indicates On.

11. ERR: Error is occurs in CPU, LED indicates On.
12. Key state: Key state information of CPU.
468

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

Expansion base
It displays base number of expansion module.
Base information
1.
Base information contains the information of base connection and cable.
2.
By selecting expansion drive module/expansion manager and PLC > Module

Information, Base information displays.
3.
Double-click the expansion drive module/expansion manager, the base information

displays.
The above diagram displays the following:

1.
R200
January 2011
Base Number: Base number which is set in the switch of base setting for expansion
drive module.
Honeywell
469

2.
O/S version: OS version of expansion drive module.
3.
Node Status: It displays connection status between bases whether it is in Ring or

Bus operation.
4.
Base Total Count: Total number of nodes.
5.
Port 1 Number: Base number connected with port 1.
6.
Port 1 Cable: Cable type (Optic/Electric) connected with port 1. In case of Electric
cable, it displays the measured length of cable for port 1.
7.
Port 1 Date: In case of Electric cable, it displays the measured date for port 1.
8.
Port 2 Number: Base number connected with port 2.
9.
Port 2 Cable: Cable type (Optic/Electric) connected with port 2. In case of Electric
cable, it displays the measured length of cable for port 1.
10. Port 2 Date: In case of Electric cable, it displays the measured date for port 1.
Base changing wizard
Base can be changed easily by Base Changing Wizard while PLC is operating. Base
Changing Wizard has four steps: Selecting Base, Removing Base, Installing New Base,
and Changing Base Finished.
ATTENTION
In 2MLR system, a part of expansion base can be exchanged according to
configuration of expansion base.
Ring topology: All expansion bases can be exchanged.
Bus topology: In Bus topology, final expansion base is only changed.
Perform the following steps to change base.

Step
470
Action
Click Online > Base Changing Wizard.
In Selecting Base window, select base for changing and click Next.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

Step
Action
The field description for Selecting Base window are as follows:

Field
Description
Information: Information of the Selected Base.
Base module tree: It displays base module. Changeable base

:
displays according to connection state of expansion base (
Changeable base,
: Non-changeable base).
List of module on slot: It displays the information of module

on selected base.
Back: It is always in inactive mode while selecting base step.
Next: Next step to Removing Base step. It is in active mode

when you select changeable base.
Cancel: Cancels Base Changing Wizard execution.
ATTENTION
If Base Changing Wizard execution is canceled, selected base is
excluded from operation. Ensure to check Fault Mask and I/O Skip.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
471

Step
3
Action
Follow the information of Removing Base step and click Next.
The field description for Removing Base window are as follows:

Field
Description
Information: Information of the Removed Base.
Back: Cancels Removing Base, goes to previous step.
Next: Moves to Installing Base.
Cancel: Cancels Base Changing Wizard.
ATTENTION
Error in Removing Base is occurred when base is not removed.
4
472
Follow the information of Installing New Base, click Next.

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

Step
Action
The field description for Installing New Base window are as follows:
Field
Description
Information: Information of Installing New Base.
Back: It is in inactive mode after base is removed.
Next: Moves to Changing Base Finished.
Cancel: Cancels the Base Changing Wizard.
ATTENTION
Error in Installing New Base is occurred when base is not installed. If
base is installed normally, error is occurred when module type is
different within setting module in I/O parameter and real installed
base.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
473

Step
Action
Click Finished, when Changing Base is completed.
The field description for Changing Base Finished window are as follows:
474

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

Step
Action
Field
Description
Information: Information of Changing Base Finished.
Back: It is in inactive mode after base is removed.
Finish: Finishes Base Changing Wizard.
ATTENTION
Follow the below steps when base changing without Base Changing
Wizard.
1.
Set I/O Skip setting to change on base.
2.
Set Fault Mask on base.
3.
Remove the base from PLC.
4.
Install the base to change.
5.
Release I/O Skip setting on corresponding base.
6.
Click Online > PLC Errors/Warnings, check the error in base.
7.
Click Online > I/O Information, check if the module is installed

normally.
8.
If there is no error, release the Fault Mask on the corresponding

base.
For more information, refer to 2MLR CPU Users Guide.
R200
January 2011

Honeywell
475

476

Honeywell
R200
January 2011

1860 W. Rose Garden Lane
Phoenix, AZ 85027 USA

PLC Soft Master ML200

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

PLC Soft Master ML200

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Honeywell Process Solutions

Notices and Trademarks

Honeywell Process Solutions

SoftMaster User's Guide

About This Document

SoftMaster User's Guide - ML200

SoftMaster User's Guide

Support and Other Contacts

Support and Other Contacts

Honeywell Solution Support Center

Europe, Middle East, and Africa (EMEA)

Honeywell Global TAC Pacific

Honeywell Global TAC India

Support and Other Contacts

Honeywell Global TAC Korea

Peoples Republic of China

Honeywell Global TAC China

Honeywell Global TAC South East Asia

Honeywell Global TAC Taiwan

SoftMaster User's Guide

Support and Other Contacts

Honeywell Global TAC Japan

World Wide Web

SoftMaster User's Guide

Acronyms and Definitions

Acronyms and Definitions

Analog to Digital Conversion

Base is the back plane of the PLC on which the power

Binary coded decimal

This is one of the CPU restart modes which affects the

Central processing unit

Digital to analog conversion

Memory area which can be directly accessed with IEC

Fast Ethernet Network.

Is an operation unit that immediately outputs the operation

Is an operation unit that memorizes the operation results

High-Speed Link Service in MasterLogic-200

Acronyms and Definitions

I/O image area

Internal memory area of CPU module installed to maintain

International Electrotechnical Commission

Interrupt driven task programs executed on meeting a

Least significant bit

A standard component with a specific function to configure

Most significant bit

Point to point service in MasterLogic-200 communication

Process automation controller

Programmable logic controller

A system consisting of a PLC, CPU, modules, and

SoftMaster User's Guide

Acronyms and Definitions

Random access memory

As an abbreviation of real time clock, it is collectively

Real time clock

Serial link network.

Programming tool for creating, editing, and debugging a

Shielded twisted pair

Named variables which are declared with a name, type,

Twisted pair cables (typically CAT5 cables with RJ45

Unshield twisted pair

This is one of the CPU restart modes which affects the

A timer to monitor pre-determined execution time of a

SoftMaster User's Guide

Indicates a situation which, if not avoided, may result in equipment